hollalinux
/
linux-sg2042
mirror of https://github.com/sophgo/linux-riscv.git
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge rsync://rsync.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux-2.6

This commit is contained in:
Dmitry Torokhov 2006-06-26 01:31:38 -04:00
parent 3cbd5b32cb fcc18e83e1
commit 4854c7b27f
4455 changed files with 203021 additions and 132954 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

6
CREDITS
View File

@ -1573,12 +1573,8 @@ S: 160 00 Praha 6
S: Czech Republic
N: Niels Kristian Bech Jensen
E: nkbj@image.dk
W: http://www.image.dk/~nkbj
E: nkbj1970@hotmail.com
D: Miscellaneous kernel updates and fixes.
S: Dr. Holsts Vej 34, lejl. 164
S: DK-8230 Åbyhøj
S: Denmark
N: Michael K. Johnson
E: johnsonm@redhat.com

77
Documentation/ABI/README Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
This directory attempts to document the ABI between the Linux kernel and
userspace, and the relative stability of these interfaces. Due to the
everchanging nature of Linux, and the differing maturity levels, these
interfaces should be used by userspace programs in different ways.
We have four different levels of ABI stability, as shown by the four
different subdirectories in this location. Interfaces may change levels
of stability according to the rules described below.
The different levels of stability are:
stable/
This directory documents the interfaces that the developer has
defined to be stable. Userspace programs are free to use these
interfaces with no restrictions, and backward compatibility for
them will be guaranteed for at least 2 years. Most interfaces
(like syscalls) are expected to never change and always be
available.
testing/
This directory documents interfaces that are felt to be stable,
as the main development of this interface has been completed.
The interface can be changed to add new features, but the
current interface will not break by doing this, unless grave
errors or security problems are found in them. Userspace
programs can start to rely on these interfaces, but they must be
aware of changes that can occur before these interfaces move to
be marked stable. Programs that use these interfaces are
strongly encouraged to add their name to the description of
these interfaces, so that the kernel developers can easily
notify them if any changes occur (see the description of the
layout of the files below for details on how to do this.)
obsolete/
This directory documents interfaces that are still remaining in
the kernel, but are marked to be removed at some later point in
time. The description of the interface will document the reason
why it is obsolete and when it can be expected to be removed.
The file Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt may describe
some of these interfaces, giving a schedule for when they will
be removed.
removed/
This directory contains a list of the old interfaces that have
been removed from the kernel.
Every file in these directories will contain the following information:
What: Short description of the interface
Date: Date created
KernelVersion: Kernel version this feature first showed up in.
Contact: Primary contact for this interface (may be a mailing list)
Description: Long description of the interface and how to use it.
Users: All users of this interface who wish to be notified when
it changes. This is very important for interfaces in
the "testing" stage, so that kernel developers can work
with userspace developers to ensure that things do not
break in ways that are unacceptable. It is also
important to get feedback for these interfaces to make
sure they are working in a proper way and do not need to
be changed further.
How things move between levels:
Interfaces in stable may move to obsolete, as long as the proper
notification is given.
Interfaces may be removed from obsolete and the kernel as long as the
documented amount of time has gone by.
Interfaces in the testing state can move to the stable state when the
developers feel they are finished. They cannot be removed from the
kernel tree without going through the obsolete state first.
It's up to the developer to place their interfaces in the category they
wish for it to start out in.

13
Documentation/ABI/obsolete/devfs Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
What: devfs
Date: July 2005
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
devfs has been unmaintained for a number of years, has unfixable
races, contains a naming policy within the kernel that is
against the LSB, and can be replaced by using udev.
The files fs/devfs/*, include/linux/devfs_fs*.h will be removed,
along with the the assorted devfs function calls throughout the
kernel tree.
Users:

10
Documentation/ABI/stable/syscalls Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
What: The kernel syscall interface
Description:
This interface matches much of the POSIX interface and is based
on it and other Unix based interfaces. It will only be added to
over time, and not have things removed from it.
Note that this interface is different for every architecture
that Linux supports. Please see the architecture-specific
documentation for details on the syscall numbers that are to be
mapped to each syscall.

30
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-module Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
What: /sys/module
Description:
The /sys/module tree consists of the following structure:
/sys/module/MODULENAME
The name of the module that is in the kernel. This
module name will show up either if the module is built
directly into the kernel, or if it is loaded as a
dyanmic module.
/sys/module/MODULENAME/parameters
This directory contains individual files that are each
individual parameters of the module that are able to be
changed at runtime. See the individual module
documentation as to the contents of these parameters and
what they accomplish.
Note: The individual parameter names and values are not
considered stable, only the fact that they will be
placed in this location within sysfs. See the
individual driver documentation for details as to the
stability of the different parameters.
/sys/module/MODULENAME/refcnt
If the module is able to be unloaded from the kernel, this file
will contain the current reference count of the module.
Note: If the module is built into the kernel, or if the
CONFIG_MODULE_UNLOAD kernel configuration value is not enabled,
this file will not be present.

16
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
What: /sys/class/
Date: Febuary 2006
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
The /sys/class directory will consist of a group of
subdirectories describing individual classes of devices
in the kernel. The individual directories will consist
of either subdirectories, or symlinks to other
directories.
All programs that use this directory tree must be able
to handle both subdirectories or symlinks in order to
work properly.
Users:
udev <linux-hotplug-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>

25
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
What: /sys/devices
Date: February 2006
Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
Description:
The /sys/devices tree contains a snapshot of the
internal state of the kernel device tree. Devices will
be added and removed dynamically as the machine runs,
and between different kernel versions, the layout of the
devices within this tree will change.
Please do not rely on the format of this tree because of
this. If a program wishes to find different things in
the tree, please use the /sys/class structure and rely
on the symlinks there to point to the proper location
within the /sys/devices tree of the individual devices.
Or rely on the uevent messages to notify programs of
devices being added and removed from this tree to find
the location of those devices.
Note that sometimes not all devices along the directory
chain will have emitted uevent messages, so userspace
programs must be able to handle such occurrences.
Users:
udev <linux-hotplug-devel@lists.sourceforge.net>

100
Documentation/CodingStyle
View File

@ -155,7 +155,83 @@ problem, which is called the function-growth-hormone-imbalance syndrome.
See next chapter.
Chapter 5: Functions
Chapter 5: Typedefs
Please don't use things like "vps_t".
It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
vps_t a;
in the source, what does it mean?
In contrast, if it says
struct virtual_container *a;
you can actually tell what "a" is.
Lots of people think that typedefs "help readability". Not so. They are
useful only for:
(a) totally opaque objects (where the typedef is actively used to _hide_
what the object is).
Example: "pte_t" etc. opaque objects that you can only access using
the proper accessor functions.
NOTE! Opaqueness and "accessor functions" are not good in themselves.
The reason we have them for things like pte_t etc. is that there
really is absolutely _zero_ portably accessible information there.
(b) Clear integer types, where the abstraction _helps_ avoid confusion
whether it is "int" or "long".
u8/u16/u32 are perfectly fine typedefs, although they fit into
category (d) better than here.
NOTE! Again - there needs to be a _reason_ for this. If something is
"unsigned long", then there's no reason to do
typedef unsigned long myflags_t;
but if there is a clear reason for why it under certain circumstances
might be an "unsigned int" and under other configurations might be
"unsigned long", then by all means go ahead and use a typedef.
(c) when you use sparse to literally create a _new_ type for
type-checking.
(d) New types which are identical to standard C99 types, in certain
exceptional circumstances.
Although it would only take a short amount of time for the eyes and
brain to become accustomed to the standard types like 'uint32_t',
some people object to their use anyway.
Therefore, the Linux-specific 'u8/u16/u32/u64' types and their
signed equivalents which are identical to standard types are
permitted -- although they are not mandatory in new code of your
own.
When editing existing code which already uses one or the other set
of types, you should conform to the existing choices in that code.
(e) Types safe for use in userspace.
In certain structures which are visible to userspace, we cannot
require C99 types and cannot use the 'u32' form above. Thus, we
use __u32 and similar types in all structures which are shared
with userspace.
Maybe there are other cases too, but the rule should basically be to NEVER
EVER use a typedef unless you can clearly match one of those rules.
In general, a pointer, or a struct that has elements that can reasonably
be directly accessed should _never_ be a typedef.
Chapter 6: Functions
Functions should be short and sweet, and do just one thing. They should
fit on one or two screenfuls of text (the ISO/ANSI screen size is 80x24,
@ -183,7 +259,7 @@ and it gets confused. You know you're brilliant, but maybe you'd like
to understand what you did 2 weeks from now.
Chapter 6: Centralized exiting of functions
Chapter 7: Centralized exiting of functions
Albeit deprecated by some people, the equivalent of the goto statement is
used frequently by compilers in form of the unconditional jump instruction.
@ -220,7 +296,7 @@ out:
return result;
}
Chapter 7: Commenting
Chapter 8: Commenting
Comments are good, but there is also a danger of over-commenting. NEVER
try to explain HOW your code works in a comment: it's much better to
@ -240,7 +316,7 @@ When commenting the kernel API functions, please use the kerneldoc format.
See the files Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt and scripts/kernel-doc
for details.
Chapter 8: You've made a mess of it
Chapter 9: You've made a mess of it
That's OK, we all do. You've probably been told by your long-time Unix
user helper that "GNU emacs" automatically formats the C sources for
@ -288,7 +364,7 @@ re-formatting you may want to take a look at the man page. But
remember: "indent" is not a fix for bad programming.
Chapter 9: Configuration-files
Chapter 10: Configuration-files
For configuration options (arch/xxx/Kconfig, and all the Kconfig files),
somewhat different indentation is used.
@ -313,7 +389,7 @@ support for file-systems, for instance) should be denoted (DANGEROUS), other
experimental options should be denoted (EXPERIMENTAL).
Chapter 10: Data structures
Chapter 11: Data structures
Data structures that have visibility outside the single-threaded
environment they are created and destroyed in should always have
@ -344,7 +420,7 @@ Remember: if another thread can find your data structure, and you don't
have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
Chapter 11: Macros, Enums and RTL
Chapter 12: Macros, Enums and RTL
Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
@ -399,7 +475,7 @@ The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
Chapter 12: Printing kernel messages
Chapter 13: Printing kernel messages
Kernel developers like to be seen as literate. Do mind the spelling
of kernel messages to make a good impression. Do not use crippled
@ -410,7 +486,7 @@ Kernel messages do not have to be terminated with a period.
Printing numbers in parentheses (%d) adds no value and should be avoided.
Chapter 13: Allocating memory
Chapter 14: Allocating memory
The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kcalloc(), and vmalloc(). Please refer to the API
@ -429,7 +505,7 @@ from void pointer to any other pointer type is guaranteed by the C programming
language.
Chapter 14: The inline disease
Chapter 15: The inline disease
There appears to be a common misperception that gcc has a magic "make me
faster" speedup option called "inline". While the use of inlines can be
@ -457,7 +533,7 @@ something it would have done anyway.
Chapter 15: References
Appendix I: References
The C Programming Language, Second Edition
by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
@ -481,4 +557,4 @@ Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/
--
Last updated on 30 December 2005 by a community effort on LKML.
Last updated on 30 April 2006.

57
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
View File

@ -62,6 +62,8 @@
<sect1><title>Internal Functions</title>
!Ikernel/exit.c
!Ikernel/signal.c
!Iinclude/linux/kthread.h
!Ekernel/kthread.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Kernel objects manipulation</title>
@ -114,9 +116,33 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="kernel-lib">
<title>Basic Kernel Library Functions</title>
<para>
The Linux kernel provides more basic utility functions.
</para>
<sect1><title>Bitmap Operations</title>
!Elib/bitmap.c
!Ilib/bitmap.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Command-line Parsing</title>
!Elib/cmdline.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>CRC Functions</title>
!Elib/crc16.c
!Elib/crc32.c
!Elib/crc-ccitt.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="mm">
<title>Memory Management in Linux</title>
<sect1><title>The Slab Cache</title>
!Iinclude/linux/slab.h
!Emm/slab.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>User Space Memory Access</title>
@ -280,12 +306,13 @@ X!Ekernel/module.c
<sect1><title>MTRR Handling</title>
!Earch/i386/kernel/cpu/mtrr/main.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>PCI Support Library</title>
!Edrivers/pci/pci.c
!Edrivers/pci/pci-driver.c
!Edrivers/pci/remove.c
!Edrivers/pci/pci-acpi.c
<!-- kerneldoc does not understand to __devinit
<!-- kerneldoc does not understand __devinit
X!Edrivers/pci/search.c
-->
!Edrivers/pci/msi.c
@ -314,6 +341,13 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="firmware">
<title>Firmware Interfaces</title>
<sect1><title>DMI Interfaces</title>
!Edrivers/firmware/dmi_scan.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="devfs">
<title>The Device File System</title>
!Efs/devfs/base.c
@ -331,6 +365,18 @@ X!Earch/i386/kernel/mca.c
!Esecurity/security.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="audit">
<title>Audit Interfaces</title>
!Ekernel/audit.c
!Ikernel/auditsc.c
!Ikernel/auditfilter.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="accounting">
<title>Accounting Framework</title>
!Ikernel/acct.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="pmfuncs">
<title>Power Management</title>
!Ekernel/power/pm.c
@ -390,7 +436,6 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="blkdev">
<title>Block Devices</title>
!Eblock/ll_rw_blk.c
@ -401,6 +446,14 @@ X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
!Edrivers/char/misc.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="parportdev">
<title>Parallel Port Devices</title>
!Iinclude/linux/parport.h
!Edrivers/parport/ieee1284.c
!Edrivers/parport/share.c
!Idrivers/parport/daisy.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="viddev">
<title>Video4Linux</title>
!Edrivers/media/video/videodev.c

104
Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
View File

@ -169,6 +169,22 @@ void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
</sect2>
<sect2><title>PIO data read/write</title>
<programlisting>
void (*data_xfer) (struct ata_device *, unsigned char *, unsigned int, int);
</programlisting>
<para>
All bmdma-style drivers must implement this hook. This is the low-level
operation that actually copies the data bytes during a PIO data
transfer.
Typically the driver
will choose one of ata_pio_data_xfer_noirq(), ata_pio_data_xfer(), or
ata_mmio_data_xfer().
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>ATA command execute</title>
<programlisting>
void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
@ -204,11 +220,10 @@ command.
<programlisting>
u8 (*check_status)(struct ata_port *ap);
u8 (*check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
u8 (*check_err)(struct ata_port *ap);
</programlisting>
<para>
Reads the Status/AltStatus/Error ATA shadow register from
Reads the Status/AltStatus ATA shadow register from
hardware. On some hardware, reading the Status register has
the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition.
Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
@ -269,23 +284,6 @@ void (*set_mode) (struct ata_port *ap);
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Reset ATA bus</title>
<programlisting>
void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap);
</programlisting>
<para>
The very first step in the probe phase. Actions vary depending
on the bus type, typically. After waking up the device and probing
for device presence (PATA and SATA), typically a soft reset
(SRST) will be performed. Drivers typically use the helper
functions ata_bus_reset() or sata_phy_reset() for this hook.
Many SATA drivers use sata_phy_reset() or call it from within
their own phy_reset() functions.
</para>
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Control PCI IDE BMDMA engine</title>
<programlisting>
void (*bmdma_setup) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
@ -354,16 +352,74 @@ int (*qc_issue) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
</sect2>
<sect2><title>Timeout (error) handling</title>
<sect2><title>Exception and probe handling (EH)</title>
<programlisting>
void (*eng_timeout) (struct ata_port *ap);
void (*phy_reset) (struct ata_port *ap);
</programlisting>
<para>
This is a high level error handling function, called from the
error handling thread, when a command times out. Most newer
hardware will implement its own error handling code here. IDE BMDMA
drivers may use the helper function ata_eng_timeout().
Deprecated. Use ->error_handler() instead.
</para>
<programlisting>
void (*freeze) (struct ata_port *ap);
void (*thaw) (struct ata_port *ap);
</programlisting>
<para>
ata_port_freeze() is called when HSM violations or some other
condition disrupts normal operation of the port. A frozen port
is not allowed to perform any operation until the port is
thawed, which usually follows a successful reset.
</para>
<para>
The optional ->freeze() callback can be used for freezing the port
hardware-wise (e.g. mask interrupt and stop DMA engine). If a
port cannot be frozen hardware-wise, the interrupt handler
must ack and clear interrupts unconditionally while the port
is frozen.
</para>
<para>
The optional ->thaw() callback is called to perform the opposite of ->freeze():
prepare the port for normal operation once again. Unmask interrupts,
start DMA engine, etc.
</para>
<programlisting>
void (*error_handler) (struct ata_port *ap);
</programlisting>
<para>
->error_handler() is a driver's hook into probe, hotplug, and recovery
and other exceptional conditions. The primary responsibility of an
implementation is to call ata_do_eh() or ata_bmdma_drive_eh() with a set
of EH hooks as arguments:
</para>
<para>
'prereset' hook (may be NULL) is called during an EH reset, before any other actions
are taken.
</para>
<para>
'postreset' hook (may be NULL) is called after the EH reset is performed. Based on
existing conditions, severity of the problem, and hardware capabilities,
</para>
<para>
Either 'softreset' (may be NULL) or 'hardreset' (may be NULL) will be
called to perform the low-level EH reset.
</para>
<programlisting>
void (*post_internal_cmd) (struct ata_queued_cmd *qc);
</programlisting>
<para>
Perform any hardware-specific actions necessary to finish processing
after executing a probe-time or EH-time command via ata_exec_internal().
</para>
</sect2>

44
Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt
View File

@ -144,9 +144,47 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome!
whether the increased speed is worth it.
8. Although synchronize_rcu() is a bit slower than is call_rcu(),
it usually results in simpler code. So, unless update performance
is important or the updaters cannot block, synchronize_rcu()
should be used in preference to call_rcu().
it usually results in simpler code. So, unless update
performance is critically important or the updaters cannot block,
synchronize_rcu() should be used in preference to call_rcu().
An especially important property of the synchronize_rcu()
primitive is that it automatically self-limits: if grace periods
are delayed for whatever reason, then the synchronize_rcu()
primitive will correspondingly delay updates. In contrast,
code using call_rcu() should explicitly limit update rate in
cases where grace periods are delayed, as failing to do so can
result in excessive realtime latencies or even OOM conditions.
Ways of gaining this self-limiting property when using call_rcu()
include:
a. Keeping a count of the number of data-structure elements
used by the RCU-protected data structure, including those
waiting for a grace period to elapse. Enforce a limit
on this number, stalling updates as needed to allow
previously deferred frees to complete.
Alternatively, limit only the number awaiting deferred
free rather than the total number of elements.
b. Limiting update rate. For example, if updates occur only
once per hour, then no explicit rate limiting is required,
unless your system is already badly broken. The dcache
subsystem takes this approach -- updates are guarded
by a global lock, limiting their rate.
c. Trusted update -- if updates can only be done manually by
superuser or some other trusted user, then it might not
be necessary to automatically limit them. The theory
here is that superuser already has lots of ways to crash
the machine.
d. Use call_rcu_bh() rather than call_rcu(), in order to take
advantage of call_rcu_bh()'s faster grace periods.
e. Periodically invoke synchronize_rcu(), permitting a limited
number of updates per grace period.
9. All RCU list-traversal primitives, which include
list_for_each_rcu(), list_for_each_entry_rcu(),

13
Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
View File

@ -184,7 +184,17 @@ synchronize_rcu()
blocking, it registers a function and argument which are invoked
after all ongoing RCU read-side critical sections have completed.
This callback variant is particularly useful in situations where
it is illegal to block.
it is illegal to block or where update-side performance is
critically important.
However, the call_rcu() API should not be used lightly, as use
of the synchronize_rcu() API generally results in simpler code.
In addition, the synchronize_rcu() API has the nice property
of automatically limiting update rate should grace periods
be delayed. This property results in system resilience in face
of denial-of-service attacks. Code using call_rcu() should limit
update rate in order to gain this same sort of resilience. See
checklist.txt for some approaches to limiting the update rate.
rcu_assign_pointer()
@ -790,7 +800,6 @@ RCU pointer update:
RCU grace period:
synchronize_kernel (deprecated)
synchronize_net
synchronize_sched
synchronize_rcu

57
Documentation/SubmitChecklist Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
Linux Kernel patch sumbittal checklist
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Here are some basic things that developers should do if they
want to see their kernel patch submittals accepted quicker.
These are all above and beyond the documentation that is provided
in Documentation/SubmittingPatches and elsewhere about submitting
Linux kernel patches.
- Builds cleanly with applicable or modified CONFIG options =y, =m, and =n.
No gcc warnings/errors, no linker warnings/errors.
- Passes allnoconfig, allmodconfig
- Builds on multiple CPU arch-es by using local cross-compile tools
or something like PLM at OSDL.
- ppc64 is a good architecture for cross-compilation checking because it
tends to use `unsigned long' for 64-bit quantities.
- Matches kernel coding style(!)
- Any new or modified CONFIG options don't muck up the config menu.
- All new Kconfig options have help text.
- Has been carefully reviewed with respect to relevant Kconfig
combinations. This is very hard to get right with testing --
brainpower pays off here.
- Check cleanly with sparse.
- Use 'make checkstack' and 'make namespacecheck' and fix any
problems that they find. Note: checkstack does not point out
problems explicitly, but any one function that uses more than
512 bytes on the stack is a candidate for change.
- Include kernel-doc to document global kernel APIs. (Not required
for static functions, but OK there also.) Use 'make htmldocs'
or 'make mandocs' to check the kernel-doc and fix any issues.
- Has been tested with CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT,
CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES,
CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP all simultaneously
enabled.
- Has been build- and runtime tested with and without CONFIG_SMP and
CONFIG_PREEMPT.
- If the patch affects IO/Disk, etc: has been tested with and without
CONFIG_LBD.
2006-APR-27

61
Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
README on the ADC/Touchscreen Controller
========================================
The LH79524 and LH7A404 include a built-in Analog to Digital
controller (ADC) that is used to process input from a touchscreen.
The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol.
The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
touch threshold. Some resistive displays and board combinations may
require tuning of this threshold. The driver exposes some of it's
internal state in the sys filesystem. If the kernel is configured
with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
directory
/sys/devices/platform/adc-lh7.0
containing these files.
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 samples
-rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold
-r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold_range
The threshold is the current touch threshold. It defaults to 750 on
most targets.
# cat threshold
750
The threshold_range contains the range of valid values for the
threshold. Values outside of this range will be silently ignored.
# cat threshold_range
0 1023
To change the threshold, write a value to the threshold file.
# echo 500 > threshold
# cat threshold
500
The samples file contains the most recently sampled values from the
ADC. There are 12. Below are typical of the last sampled values when
the pen has been released. The first two and last two samples are for
detecting whether or not the pen is down. The third through sixth are
X coordinate samples. The seventh through tenth are Y coordinate
samples.
# cat samples
1023 1023 0 0 0 0 530 529 530 529 1023 1023
To determine a reasonable threshold, press on the touch panel with an
appropriate stylus and read the values from samples.
# cat samples
1023 676 92 103 101 102 855 919 922 922 1023 679
The first and eleventh samples are discarded. Thus, the important
values are the second and twelfth which are used to determine if the
pen is down. When both are below the threshold, the driver registers
that the pen is down. When either is above the threshold, it
registers then pen is up.

59
Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
README on the LCD Panels
========================
Configuration options for several LCD panels, available from Logic PD,
are included in the kernel source. This README will help you
understand the configuration data and give you some guidance for
adding support for other panels if you wish.
lcd-panels.h
------------
There is no way, at present, to detect which panel is attached to the
system at runtime. Thus the kernel configuration is static. The file
arch/arm/mach-ld7a40x/lcd-panels.h (or similar) defines all of the
panel specific parameters.
It should be possible for this data to be shared among several device
families. The current layout may be insufficiently general, but it is
amenable to improvement.
PIXEL_CLOCK
-----------
The panel data sheets will give a range of acceptable pixel clocks.
The fundamental LCDCLK input frequency is divided down by a PCD
constant in field '.tim2'. It may happen that it is impossible to set
the pixel clock within this range. A clock which is too slow will
tend to flicker. For the highest quality image, set the clock as high
as possible.
MARGINS
-------
These values may be difficult to glean from the panel data sheet. In
the case of the Sharp panels, the upper margin is explicitly called
out as a specific number of lines from the top of the frame. The
other values may not matter as much as the panels tend to
automatically center the image.
Sync Sense
----------
The sense of the hsync and vsync pulses may be called out in the data
sheet. On one panel, the sense of these pulses determine the height
of the visible region on the panel. Most of the Sharp panels use
negative sense sync pulses set by the TIM2_IHS and TIM2_IVS bits in
'.tim2'.
Pel Layout
----------
The Sharp color TFT panels are all configured for 16 bit direct color
modes. The amba-lcd driver sets the pel mode to 565 for 5 bits of
each red and blue and 6 bits of green.

130
Documentation/devices.txt
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
Maintained by Torben Mathiasen <device@lanana.org>
Last revised: 25 January 2005
Last revised: 15 May 2006
This list is the Linux Device List, the official registry of allocated
device numbers and /dev directory nodes for the Linux operating
@ -94,7 +94,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
9 = /dev/urandom Faster, less secure random number gen.
10 = /dev/aio Asyncronous I/O notification interface
11 = /dev/kmsg Writes to this come out as printk's
12 = /dev/oldmem Access to crash dump from kexec kernel
1 block RAM disk
0 = /dev/ram0 First RAM disk
1 = /dev/ram1 Second RAM disk
@ -262,13 +261,13 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
NOTE: These devices permit both read and write access.
7 block Loopback devices
0 = /dev/loop0 First loopback device
1 = /dev/loop1 Second loopback device
0 = /dev/loop0 First loop device
1 = /dev/loop1 Second loop device
...
The loopback devices are used to mount filesystems not
The loop devices are used to mount filesystems not
associated with block devices. The binding to the
loopback devices is handled by mount(8) or losetup(8).
loop devices is handled by mount(8) or losetup(8).
8 block SCSI disk devices (0-15)
0 = /dev/sda First SCSI disk whole disk
@ -943,7 +942,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
240 = /dev/ftlp FTL on 16th Memory Technology Device
Partitions are handled in the same way as for IDE
disks (see major number 3) expect that the partition
disks (see major number 3) except that the partition
limit is 15 rather than 63 per disk (same as SCSI.)
45 char isdn4linux ISDN BRI driver
@ -1168,7 +1167,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
The filename of the encrypted container and the passwords
are sent via ioctls (using the sdmount tool) to the master
node which then activates them via one of the
/dev/scramdisk/x nodes for loopback mounting (all handled
/dev/scramdisk/x nodes for loop mounting (all handled
through the sdmount tool).
Requested by: andy@scramdisklinux.org
@ -2538,18 +2537,32 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
0 = /dev/usb/lp0 First USB printer
...
15 = /dev/usb/lp15 16th USB printer
16 = /dev/usb/mouse0 First USB mouse
...
31 = /dev/usb/mouse15 16th USB mouse
32 = /dev/usb/ez0 First USB firmware loader
...
47 = /dev/usb/ez15 16th USB firmware loader
48 = /dev/usb/scanner0 First USB scanner
...
63 = /dev/usb/scanner15 16th USB scanner
64 = /dev/usb/rio500 Diamond Rio 500
65 = /dev/usb/usblcd USBLCD Interface (info@usblcd.de)
66 = /dev/usb/cpad0 Synaptics cPad (mouse/LCD)
96 = /dev/usb/hiddev0 1st USB HID device
...
111 = /dev/usb/hiddev15 16th USB HID device
112 = /dev/usb/auer0 1st auerswald ISDN device
...
127 = /dev/usb/auer15 16th auerswald ISDN device
128 = /dev/usb/brlvgr0 First Braille Voyager device
...
131 = /dev/usb/brlvgr3 Fourth Braille Voyager device
132 = /dev/usb/idmouse ID Mouse (fingerprint scanner) device
133 = /dev/usb/sisusbvga1 First SiSUSB VGA device
...
140 = /dev/usb/sisusbvga8 Eigth SISUSB VGA device
144 = /dev/usb/lcd USB LCD device
160 = /dev/usb/legousbtower0 1st USB Legotower device
...
175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15 16th USB Legotower device
240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0 First daubusb device
...
243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3 Fourth dabusb device
180 block USB block devices
0 = /dev/uba First USB block device
@ -2710,6 +2723,17 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
1 = /dev/cpu/1/msr MSRs on CPU 1
...
202 block Xen Virtual Block Device
0 = /dev/xvda First Xen VBD whole disk
16 = /dev/xvdb Second Xen VBD whole disk
32 = /dev/xvdc Third Xen VBD whole disk
...
240 = /dev/xvdp Sixteenth Xen VBD whole disk
Partitions are handled in the same way as for IDE
disks (see major number 3) except that the limit on
partitions is 15.
203 char CPU CPUID information
0 = /dev/cpu/0/cpuid CPUID on CPU 0
1 = /dev/cpu/1/cpuid CPUID on CPU 1
@ -2747,11 +2771,27 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
46 = /dev/ttyCPM0 PPC CPM (SCC or SMC) - port 0
...
47 = /dev/ttyCPM5 PPC CPM (SCC or SMC) - port 5
50 = /dev/ttyIOC40 Altix serial card
50 = /dev/ttyIOC0 Altix serial card
...
81 = /dev/ttyIOC431 Altix serial card
81 = /dev/ttyIOC31 Altix serial card
82 = /dev/ttyVR0 NEC VR4100 series SIU
83 = /dev/ttyVR1 NEC VR4100 series DSIU
84 = /dev/ttyIOC84 Altix ioc4 serial card
...
115 = /dev/ttyIOC115 Altix ioc4 serial card
116 = /dev/ttySIOC0 Altix ioc3 serial card
...
147 = /dev/ttySIOC31 Altix ioc3 serial card
148 = /dev/ttyPSC0 PPC PSC - port 0
...
153 = /dev/ttyPSC5 PPC PSC - port 5
154 = /dev/ttyAT0 ATMEL serial port 0
...
169 = /dev/ttyAT15 ATMEL serial port 15
170 = /dev/ttyNX0 Hilscher netX serial port 0
...
185 = /dev/ttyNX15 Hilscher netX serial port 15
186 = /dev/ttyJ0 JTAG1 DCC protocol based serial port emulation
205 char Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
0 = /dev/culu0 Callout device for ttyLU0
@ -2897,7 +2937,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
...
196 = /dev/dvb/adapter3/video0 first video decoder of fourth card
216 char Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY devices
0 = /dev/rfcomm0 First Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY device
1 = /dev/rfcomm1 Second Bluetooth RFCOMM TTY device
@ -3002,12 +3041,43 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
ioctl()'s can be used to rewind the tape regardless of
the device used to access it.
231 char InfiniBand MAD
231 char InfiniBand
0 = /dev/infiniband/umad0
1 = /dev/infiniband/umad1
...
63 = /dev/infiniband/umad63 63rd InfiniBandMad device
64 = /dev/infiniband/issm0 First InfiniBand IsSM device
65 = /dev/infiniband/issm1 Second InfiniBand IsSM device
...
127 = /dev/infiniband/issm63 63rd InfiniBand IsSM device
128 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs0 First InfiniBand verbs device
129 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs1 Second InfiniBand verbs device
...
159 = /dev/infiniband/uverbs31 31st InfiniBand verbs device
232-239 UNASSIGNED
232 char Biometric Devices
0 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/fingerprint first fingerprint sensor on first device
1 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/iris first iris sensor on first device
2 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/retina first retina sensor on first device
3 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/voiceprint first voiceprint sensor on first device
4 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/facial first facial sensor on first device
5 = /dev/biometric/sensor0/hand first hand sensor on first device
...
10 = /dev/biometric/sensor1/fingerprint first fingerprint sensor on second device
...
20 = /dev/biometric/sensor2/fingerprint first fingerprint sensor on third device
...
233 char PathScale InfiniPath interconnect
0 = /dev/ipath Primary device for programs (any unit)
1 = /dev/ipath0 Access specifically to unit 0
2 = /dev/ipath1 Access specifically to unit 1
...
4 = /dev/ipath3 Access specifically to unit 3
129 = /dev/ipath_sma Device used by Subnet Management Agent
130 = /dev/ipath_diag Device used by diagnostics programs
234-239 UNASSIGNED
240-254 char LOCAL/EXPERIMENTAL USE
240-254 block LOCAL/EXPERIMENTAL USE
@ -3021,6 +3091,28 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated.
This major is reserved to assist the expansion to a
larger number space. No device nodes with this major
should ever be created on the filesystem.
(This is probaly not true anymore, but I'll leave it
for now /Torben)
---LARGE MAJORS!!!!!---
256 char Equinox SST multi-port serial boards
0 = /dev/ttyEQ0 First serial port on first Equinox SST board
127 = /dev/ttyEQ127 Last serial port on first Equinox SST board
128 = /dev/ttyEQ128 First serial port on second Equinox SST board
...
1027 = /dev/ttyEQ1027 Last serial port on eighth Equinox SST board
256 block Resident Flash Disk Flash Translation Layer
0 = /dev/rfda First RFD FTL layer
16 = /dev/rfdb Second RFD FTL layer
...
240 = /dev/rfdp 16th RFD FTL layer
257 char Phoenix Technologies Cryptographic Services Driver
0 = /dev/ptlsec Crypto Services Driver
**** ADDITIONAL /dev DIRECTORY ENTRIES

28
Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
View File

@ -33,27 +33,12 @@ Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
---------------------------
What: RCU API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL
When: April 2006
Files: include/linux/rcupdate.h, kernel/rcupdate.c
Why: Outside of Linux, the only implementations of anything even
vaguely resembling RCU that I am aware of are in DYNIX/ptx,
VM/XA, Tornado, and K42. I do not expect anyone to port binary
drivers or kernel modules from any of these, since the first two
are owned by IBM and the last two are open-source research OSes.
So these will move to GPL after a grace period to allow
people, who might be using implementations that I am not aware
of, to adjust to this upcoming change.
Who: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@us.ibm.com>
---------------------------
What: raw1394: requests of type RAW1394_REQ_ISO_SEND, RAW1394_REQ_ISO_LISTEN
When: November 2005
When: November 2006
Why: Deprecated in favour of the new ioctl-based rawiso interface, which is
more efficient. You should really be using libraw1394 for raw1394
access anyway.
Who: Jody McIntyre <scjody@steamballoon.com>
Who: Jody McIntyre <scjody@modernduck.com>
---------------------------
@ -212,15 +197,6 @@ Who: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---------------------------
What: Support for NEC DDB5074 and DDB5476 evaluation boards.
When: June 2006
Why: Board specific code doesn't build anymore since ~2.6.0 and no
users have complained indicating there is no more need for these
boards. This should really be considered a last call.
Who: Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
---------------------------
What: USB driver API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL
When: Febuary 2008
Files: include/linux/usb.h, drivers/usb/core/driver.c

9
Documentation/filesystems/Locking
View File

@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ prototypes:
int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct kstatfs *);
int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);
@ -142,15 +142,16 @@ see also dquot_operations section.
--------------------------- file_system_type ---------------------------
prototypes:
struct super_block *(*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
const char *, void *);
struct int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *);
void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
locking rules:
may block BKL
get_sb yes yes
kill_sb yes yes
->get_sb() returns error or a locked superblock (exclusive on ->s_umount).
->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount
(exclusive on ->s_umount).
->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it,
unlocks and drops the reference.

2
Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt
View File

@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ following procedure:
(2) Have the follow_link() op do the following steps:
(a) Call do_kern_mount() to call the appropriate filesystem to set up a
(a) Call vfs_kern_mount() to call the appropriate filesystem to set up a
superblock and gain a vfsmount structure representing it.
(b) Copy the nameidata provided as an argument and substitute the dentry

118
Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt
View File

@ -18,6 +18,14 @@ Non-privileged mount (or user mount):
user. NOTE: this is not the same as mounts allowed with the "user"
option in /etc/fstab, which is not discussed here.
Filesystem connection:
A connection between the filesystem daemon and the kernel. The
connection exists until either the daemon dies, or the filesystem is
umounted. Note that detaching (or lazy umounting) the filesystem
does _not_ break the connection, in this case it will exist until
the last reference to the filesystem is released.
Mount owner:
The user who does the mounting.
@ -86,16 +94,20 @@ Mount options
The default is infinite. Note that the size of read requests is
limited anyway to 32 pages (which is 128kbyte on i386).
Sysfs
~~~~~
Control filesystem
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
FUSE sets up the following hierarchy in sysfs:
There's a control filesystem for FUSE, which can be mounted by:
/sys/fs/fuse/connections/N/
mount -t fusectl none /sys/fs/fuse/connections
where N is an increasing number allocated to each new connection.
Mounting it under the '/sys/fs/fuse/connections' directory makes it
backwards compatible with earlier versions.
For each connection the following attributes are defined:
Under the fuse control filesystem each connection has a directory
named by a unique number.
For each connection the following files exist within this directory:
'waiting'
@ -110,7 +122,47 @@ For each connection the following attributes are defined:
connection. This means that all waiting requests will be aborted an
error returned for all aborted and new requests.
Only a privileged user may read or write these attributes.
Only the owner of the mount may read or write these files.
Interrupting filesystem operations
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If a process issuing a FUSE filesystem request is interrupted, the
following will happen:
1) If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is
fatal (SIGKILL or unhandled fatal signal), then the request is
dequeued and returns immediately.
2) If the request is not yet sent to userspace AND the signal is not
fatal, then an 'interrupted' flag is set for the request. When
the request has been successfully transfered to userspace and
this flag is set, an INTERRUPT request is queued.
3) If the request is already sent to userspace, then an INTERRUPT
request is queued.
INTERRUPT requests take precedence over other requests, so the
userspace filesystem will receive queued INTERRUPTs before any others.
The userspace filesystem may ignore the INTERRUPT requests entirely,
or may honor them by sending a reply to the _original_ request, with
the error set to EINTR.
It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
original request and it's INTERRUPT request. There are two possibilities:
1) The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
processed
2) The INTERRUPT request is processed after the original request has
been answered
If the filesystem cannot find the original request, it should wait for
some timeout and/or a number of new requests to arrive, after which it
should reply to the INTERRUPT request with an EAGAIN error. In case
1) the INTERRUPT request will be requeued. In case 2) the INTERRUPT
reply will be ignored.
Aborting a filesystem connection
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ -139,8 +191,8 @@ the filesystem. There are several ways to do this:
- Use forced umount (umount -f). Works in all cases but only if
filesystem is still attached (it hasn't been lazy unmounted)
- Abort filesystem through the sysfs interface. Most powerful
method, always works.
- Abort filesystem through the FUSE control filesystem. Most
powerful method, always works.
How do non-privileged mounts work?
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ -304,25 +356,7 @@ Scenario 1 - Simple deadlock
| | for "file"]
| | *DEADLOCK*
The solution for this is to allow requests to be interrupted while
they are in userspace:
| [interrupted by signal] |
| <fuse_unlink() |
| [release semaphore] | [semaphore acquired]
| <sys_unlink() |
| | >fuse_unlink()
| | [queue req on fc->pending]
| | [wake up fc->waitq]
| | [sleep on req->waitq]
If the filesystem daemon was single threaded, this will stop here,
since there's no other thread to dequeue and execute the request.
In this case the solution is to kill the FUSE daemon as well. If
there are multiple serving threads, you just have to kill them as
long as any remain.
Moral: a filesystem which deadlocks, can soon find itself dead.
The solution for this is to allow the filesystem to be aborted.
Scenario 2 - Tricky deadlock
----------------------------
@ -355,24 +389,14 @@ but is caused by a pagefault.
| | [lock page]
| | * DEADLOCK *
Solution is again to let the the request be interrupted (not
elaborated further).
Solution is basically the same as above.
An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being
copied to the request, the request must not be interrupted. This
is because the destination address of the copy may not be valid
after the request is interrupted.
An additional problem is that while the write buffer is being copied
to the request, the request must not be interrupted/aborted. This is
because the destination address of the copy may not be valid after the
request has returned.
This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing
interruption while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are
faulted with get_user_pages(). The 'req->locked' flag indicates
when the copy is taking place, and interruption is delayed until
this flag is unset.
Scenario 3 - Tricky deadlock with asynchronous read
---------------------------------------------------
The same situation as above, except thread-1 will wait on page lock
and hence it will be uninterruptible as well. The solution is to
abort the connection with forced umount (if mount is attached) or
through the abort attribute in sysfs.
This is solved with doing the copy atomically, and allowing abort
while the page(s) belonging to the write buffer are faulted with
get_user_pages(). The 'req->locked' flag indicates when the copy is
taking place, and abort is delayed until this flag is unset.

130
Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt
View File

@ -69,17 +69,135 @@ Prototypes:
int inotify_rm_watch (int fd, __u32 mask);
(iii) Internal Kernel Implementation
(iii) Kernel Interface
Each inotify instance is associated with an inotify_device structure.
Inotify's kernel API consists a set of functions for managing watches and an
event callback.
To use the kernel API, you must first initialize an inotify instance with a set
of inotify_operations. You are given an opaque inotify_handle, which you use
for any further calls to inotify.
struct inotify_handle *ih = inotify_init(my_event_handler);
You must provide a function for processing events and a function for destroying
the inotify watch.
void handle_event(struct inotify_watch *watch, u32 wd, u32 mask,
u32 cookie, const char *name, struct inode *inode)
watch - the pointer to the inotify_watch that triggered this call
wd - the watch descriptor
mask - describes the event that occurred
cookie - an identifier for synchronizing events
name - the dentry name for affected files in a directory-based event
inode - the affected inode in a directory-based event
void destroy_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch)
You may add watches by providing a pre-allocated and initialized inotify_watch
structure and specifying the inode to watch along with an inotify event mask.
You must pin the inode during the call. You will likely wish to embed the
inotify_watch structure in a structure of your own which contains other
information about the watch. Once you add an inotify watch, it is immediately
subject to removal depending on filesystem events. You must grab a reference if
you depend on the watch hanging around after the call.
inotify_init_watch(&my_watch->iwatch);
inotify_get_watch(&my_watch->iwatch); // optional
s32 wd = inotify_add_watch(ih, &my_watch->iwatch, inode, mask);
inotify_put_watch(&my_watch->iwatch); // optional
You may use the watch descriptor (wd) or the address of the inotify_watch for
other inotify operations. You must not directly read or manipulate data in the
inotify_watch. Additionally, you must not call inotify_add_watch() more than
once for a given inotify_watch structure, unless you have first called either
inotify_rm_watch() or inotify_rm_wd().
To determine if you have already registered a watch for a given inode, you may
call inotify_find_watch(), which gives you both the wd and the watch pointer for
the inotify_watch, or an error if the watch does not exist.
wd = inotify_find_watch(ih, inode, &watchp);
You may use container_of() on the watch pointer to access your own data
associated with a given watch. When an existing watch is found,
inotify_find_watch() bumps the refcount before releasing its locks. You must
put that reference with:
put_inotify_watch(watchp);
Call inotify_find_update_watch() to update the event mask for an existing watch.
inotify_find_update_watch() returns the wd of the updated watch, or an error if
the watch does not exist.
wd = inotify_find_update_watch(ih, inode, mask);
An existing watch may be removed by calling either inotify_rm_watch() or
inotify_rm_wd().
int ret = inotify_rm_watch(ih, &my_watch->iwatch);
int ret = inotify_rm_wd(ih, wd);
A watch may be removed while executing your event handler with the following:
inotify_remove_watch_locked(ih, iwatch);
Call inotify_destroy() to remove all watches from your inotify instance and
release it. If there are no outstanding references, inotify_destroy() will call
your destroy_watch op for each watch.
inotify_destroy(ih);
When inotify removes a watch, it sends an IN_IGNORED event to your callback.
You may use this event as an indication to free the watch memory. Note that
inotify may remove a watch due to filesystem events, as well as by your request.
If you use IN_ONESHOT, inotify will remove the watch after the first event, at
which point you may call the final inotify_put_watch.
(iv) Kernel Interface Prototypes
struct inotify_handle *inotify_init(struct inotify_operations *ops);
inotify_init_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
s32 inotify_add_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
struct inotify_watch *watch,
struct inode *inode, u32 mask);
s32 inotify_find_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih, struct inode *inode,
struct inotify_watch **watchp);
s32 inotify_find_update_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
struct inode *inode, u32 mask);
int inotify_rm_wd(struct inotify_handle *ih, u32 wd);
int inotify_rm_watch(struct inotify_handle *ih,
struct inotify_watch *watch);
void inotify_remove_watch_locked(struct inotify_handle *ih,
struct inotify_watch *watch);
void inotify_destroy(struct inotify_handle *ih);
void get_inotify_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
void put_inotify_watch(struct inotify_watch *watch);
(v) Internal Kernel Implementation
Each inotify instance is represented by an inotify_handle structure.
Inotify's userspace consumers also have an inotify_device which is
associated with the inotify_handle, and on which events are queued.
Each watch is associated with an inotify_watch structure. Watches are chained
off of each associated device and each associated inode.
off of each associated inotify_handle and each associated inode.
See fs/inotify.c for the locking and lifetime rules.
See fs/inotify.c and fs/inotify_user.c for the locking and lifetime rules.
(iv) Rationale
(vi) Rationale
Q: What is the design decision behind not tying the watch to the open fd of
the watched object?
@ -145,7 +263,7 @@ A: The poor user-space interface is the second biggest problem with dnotify.
file descriptor-based one that allows basic file I/O and poll/select.
Obtaining the fd and managing the watches could have been done either via a
device file or a family of new system calls. We decided to implement a
family of system calls because that is the preffered approach for new kernel
family of system calls because that is the preferred approach for new kernel
interfaces. The only real difference was whether we wanted to use open(2)
and ioctl(2) or a couple of new system calls. System calls beat ioctls.

7
Documentation/filesystems/porting
View File

@ -50,10 +50,11 @@ Turn your foo_read_super() into a function that would return 0 in case of
success and negative number in case of error (-EINVAL unless you have more
informative error value to report). Call it foo_fill_super(). Now declare
struct super_block foo_get_sb(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
int flags, const char *dev_name, void *data)
int foo_get_sb(struct file_system_type *fs_type,
int flags, const char *dev_name, void *data, struct vfsmount *mnt)
{
return get_sb_bdev(fs_type, flags, dev_name, data, ext2_fill_super);
return get_sb_bdev(fs_type, flags, dev_name, data, foo_fill_super,
mnt);
}
(or similar with s/bdev/nodev/ or s/bdev/single/, depending on the kind of

146
Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
View File

@ -70,11 +70,13 @@ tmpfs mounts. See Documentation/filesystems/tmpfs.txt for more information.
What is rootfs?
---------------
Rootfs is a special instance of ramfs, which is always present in 2.6 systems.
(It's used internally as the starting and stopping point for searches of the
kernel's doubly-linked list of mount points.)
Rootfs is a special instance of ramfs (or tmpfs, if that's enabled), which is
always present in 2.6 systems. You can't unmount rootfs for approximately the
same reason you can't kill the init process; rather than having special code
to check for and handle an empty list, it's smaller and simpler for the kernel
to just make sure certain lists can't become empty.
Most systems just mount another filesystem over it and ignore it. The
Most systems just mount another filesystem over rootfs and ignore it. The
amount of space an empty instance of ramfs takes up is tiny.
What is initramfs?
@ -92,14 +94,16 @@ out of that.
All this differs from the old initrd in several ways:
- The old initrd was a separate file, while the initramfs archive is linked
into the linux kernel image. (The directory linux-*/usr is devoted to
generating this archive during the build.)
- The old initrd was always a separate file, while the initramfs archive is
linked into the linux kernel image. (The directory linux-*/usr is devoted
to generating this archive during the build.)
- The old initrd file was a gzipped filesystem image (in some file format,
such as ext2, that had to be built into the kernel), while the new
such as ext2, that needed a driver built into the kernel), while the new
initramfs archive is a gzipped cpio archive (like tar only simpler,
see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt).
see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt). The
kernel's cpio extraction code is not only extremely small, it's also
__init data that can be discarded during the boot process.
- The program run by the old initrd (which was called /initrd, not /init) did
some setup and then returned to the kernel, while the init program from
@ -124,13 +128,14 @@ Populating initramfs:
The 2.6 kernel build process always creates a gzipped cpio format initramfs
archive and links it into the resulting kernel binary. By default, this
archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86). The config option
CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under devices->block devices
in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used to specify a source for
the initramfs archive, which will automatically be incorporated into the
resulting binary. This option can point to an existing gzipped cpio archive, a
directory containing files to be archived, or a text file specification such
as the following example:
archive is empty (consuming 134 bytes on x86).
The config option CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE (for some reason buried under
devices->block devices in menuconfig, and living in usr/Kconfig) can be used
to specify a source for the initramfs archive, which will automatically be
incorporated into the resulting binary. This option can point to an existing
gzipped cpio archive, a directory containing files to be archived, or a text
file specification such as the following example:
dir /dev 755 0 0
nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1
@ -146,23 +151,84 @@ as the following example:
Run "usr/gen_init_cpio" (after the kernel build) to get a usage message
documenting the above file format.
One advantage of the text file is that root access is not required to
One advantage of the configuration file is that root access is not required to
set permissions or create device nodes in the new archive. (Note that those
two example "file" entries expect to find files named "init.sh" and "busybox" in
a directory called "initramfs", under the linux-2.6.* directory. See
Documentation/early-userspace/README for more details.)
The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools, gen_init_cpio is created
from usr/gen_init_cpio.c which is entirely self-contained, and the kernel's
boot-time extractor is also (obviously) self-contained. However, if you _do_
happen to have cpio installed, the following command line can extract the
generated cpio image back into its component files:
The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools. If you specify a
directory instead of a configuration file, the kernel's build infrastructure
creates a configuration file from that directory (usr/Makefile calls
scripts/gen_initramfs_list.sh), and proceeds to package up that directory
using the config file (by feeding it to usr/gen_init_cpio, which is created
from usr/gen_init_cpio.c). The kernel's build-time cpio creation code is
entirely self-contained, and the kernel's boot-time extractor is also
(obviously) self-contained.
The one thing you might need external cpio utilities installed for is creating
or extracting your own preprepared cpio files to feed to the kernel build
(instead of a config file or directory).
The following command line can extract a cpio image (either by the above script
or by the kernel build) back into its component files:
cpio -i -d -H newc -F initramfs_data.cpio --no-absolute-filenames
The following shell script can create a prebuilt cpio archive you can
use in place of the above config file:
#!/bin/sh
# Copyright 2006 Rob Landley <rob@landley.net> and TimeSys Corporation.
# Licensed under GPL version 2
if [ $# -ne 2 ]
then
echo "usage: mkinitramfs directory imagename.cpio.gz"
exit 1
fi
if [ -d "$1" ]
then
echo "creating $2 from $1"
(cd "$1"; find . | cpio -o -H newc | gzip) > "$2"
else
echo "First argument must be a directory"
exit 1
fi
Note: The cpio man page contains some bad advice that will break your initramfs
archive if you follow it. It says "A typical way to generate the list
of filenames is with the find command; you should give find the -depth option
to minimize problems with permissions on directories that are unwritable or not
searchable." Don't do this when creating initramfs.cpio.gz images, it won't
work. The Linux kernel cpio extractor won't create files in a directory that
doesn't exist, so the directory entries must go before the files that go in
those directories. The above script gets them in the right order.
External initramfs images:
--------------------------
If the kernel has initrd support enabled, an external cpio.gz archive can also
be passed into a 2.6 kernel in place of an initrd. In this case, the kernel
will autodetect the type (initramfs, not initrd) and extract the external cpio
archive into rootfs before trying to run /init.
This has the memory efficiency advantages of initramfs (no ramdisk block
device) but the separate packaging of initrd (which is nice if you have
non-GPL code you'd like to run from initramfs, without conflating it with
the GPL licensed Linux kernel binary).
It can also be used to supplement the kernel's built-in initamfs image. The
files in the external archive will overwrite any conflicting files in
the built-in initramfs archive. Some distributors also prefer to customize
a single kernel image with task-specific initramfs images, without recompiling.
Contents of initramfs:
----------------------
An initramfs archive is a complete self-contained root filesystem for Linux.
If you don't already understand what shared libraries, devices, and paths
you need to get a minimal root filesystem up and running, here are some
references:
@ -176,13 +242,36 @@ code against, along with some related utilities. It is BSD licensed.
I use uClibc (http://www.uclibc.org) and busybox (http://www.busybox.net)
myself. These are LGPL and GPL, respectively. (A self-contained initramfs
package is planned for the busybox 1.2 release.)
package is planned for the busybox 1.3 release.)
In theory you could use glibc, but that's not well suited for small embedded
uses like this. (A "hello world" program statically linked against glibc is
over 400k. With uClibc it's 7k. Also note that glibc dlopens libnss to do
name lookups, even when otherwise statically linked.)
A good first step is to get initramfs to run a statically linked "hello world"
program as init, and test it under an emulator like qemu (www.qemu.org) or
User Mode Linux, like so:
cat > hello.c << EOF
#include <stdio.h>
#include <unistd.h>
int main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
printf("Hello world!\n");
sleep(999999999);
}
EOF
gcc -static hello2.c -o init
echo init | cpio -o -H newc | gzip > test.cpio.gz
# Testing external initramfs using the initrd loading mechanism.
qemu -kernel /boot/vmlinuz -initrd test.cpio.gz /dev/zero
When debugging a normal root filesystem, it's nice to be able to boot with
"init=/bin/sh". The initramfs equivalent is "rdinit=/bin/sh", and it's
just as useful.
Why cpio rather than tar?
-------------------------
@ -241,7 +330,7 @@ the above threads) is:
Future directions:
------------------
Today (2.6.14), initramfs is always compiled in, but not always used. The
Today (2.6.16), initramfs is always compiled in, but not always used. The
kernel falls back to legacy boot code that is reached only if initramfs does
not contain an /init program. The fallback is legacy code, there to ensure a
smooth transition and allowing early boot functionality to gradually move to
@ -258,8 +347,9 @@ and so on.
This kind of complexity (which inevitably includes policy) is rightly handled
in userspace. Both klibc and busybox/uClibc are working on simple initramfs
packages to drop into a kernel build, and when standard solutions are ready
and widely deployed, the kernel's legacy early boot code will become obsolete
and a candidate for the feature removal schedule.
packages to drop into a kernel build.
But that's a while off yet.
The klibc package has now been accepted into Andrew Morton's 2.6.17-mm tree.
The kernel's current early boot code (partition detection, etc) will probably
be migrated into a default initramfs, automatically created and used by the
kernel build.

6
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
View File

@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ members are defined:
struct file_system_type {
const char *name;
int fs_flags;
struct super_block *(*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
const char *, void *);
struct int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int,
const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *);
void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
struct module *owner;
struct file_system_type * next;
@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ struct super_operations {
int (*sync_fs)(struct super_block *sb, int wait);
void (*write_super_lockfs) (struct super_block *);
void (*unlockfs) (struct super_block *);
int (*statfs) (struct super_block *, struct kstatfs *);
int (*statfs) (struct dentry *, struct kstatfs *);
int (*remount_fs) (struct super_block *, int *, char *);
void (*clear_inode) (struct inode *);
void (*umount_begin) (struct super_block *);

59
Documentation/hwmon/abituguru Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
Kernel driver abituguru
=======================
Supported chips:
* Abit uGuru (Hardware Monitor part only)
Prefix: 'abituguru'
Addresses scanned: ISA 0x0E0
Datasheet: Not available, this driver is based on reverse engineering.
A "Datasheet" has been written based on the reverse engineering it
should be available in the same dir as this file under the name
abituguru-datasheet.
Authors:
Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>,
(Initial reverse engineering done by Olle Sandberg
<ollebull@gmail.com>)
Module Parameters
-----------------
* force: bool Force detection. Note this parameter only causes the
detection to be skipped, if the uGuru can't be read
the module initialization (insmod) will still fail.
* fan_sensors: int Tell the driver how many fan speed sensors there are
on your motherboard. Default: 0 (autodetect).
* pwms: int Tell the driver how many fan speed controls (fan
pwms) your motherboard has. Default: 0 (autodetect).
* verbose: int How verbose should the driver be? (0-3):
0 normal output
1 + verbose error reporting
2 + sensors type probing info\n"
3 + retryable error reporting
Default: 2 (the driver is still in the testing phase)
Notice if you need any of the first three options above please insmod the
driver with verbose set to 3 and mail me <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl> the output of:
dmesg | grep abituguru
Description
-----------
This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the Abit uGuru chip
found on Abit uGuru featuring motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards).
The uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit
claiming it is "a new microprocessor designed by the ABIT Engineers").
Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the W83L950D is a generic
microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it.
Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru, Olle
Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com> has managed to reverse engineer the sensor part
of the uGuru. Without his work this driver would not have been possible.
Known Issues
------------
The voltage and frequency control parts of the Abit uGuru are not supported.

312
Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,312 @@
uGuru datasheet
===============
First of all, what I know about uGuru is no fact based on any help, hints or
datasheet from Abit. The data I have got on uGuru have I assembled through
my weak knowledge in "backwards engineering".
And just for the record, you may have noticed uGuru isn't a chip developed by
Abit, as they claim it to be. It's realy just an microprocessor (uC) created by
Winbond (W83L950D). And no, reading the manual for this specific uC or
mailing Windbond for help won't give any usefull data about uGuru, as it is
the program inside the uC that is responding to calls.
Olle Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com>, 2005-05-25
Original version by Olle Sandberg who did the heavy lifting of the initial
reverse engineering. This version has been almost fully rewritten for clarity
and extended with write support and info on more databanks, the write support
is once again reverse engineered by Olle the additional databanks have been
reverse engineered by me. I would like to express my thanks to Olle, this
document and the Linux driver could not have been written without his efforts.
Note: because of the lack of specs only the sensors part of the uGuru is
described here and not the CPU / RAM / etc voltage & frequency control.
Hans de Goede <j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl>, 28-01-2006
Detection
=========
As far as known the uGuru is always placed at and using the (ISA) I/O-ports
0xE0 and 0xE4, so we don't have to scan any port-range, just check what the two
ports are holding for detection. We will refer to 0xE0 as CMD (command-port)
and 0xE4 as DATA because Abit refers to them with these names.
If DATA holds 0x00 or 0x08 and CMD holds 0x00 or 0xAC an uGuru could be
present. We have to check for two different values at data-port, because
after a reboot uGuru will hold 0x00 here, but if the driver is removed and
later on attached again data-port will hold 0x08, more about this later.
After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have
turned up which will hold 0x00 instead of 0xAC at the CMD port, thus we also
have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initally
hold 0x09 and will only hold 0x08 after reading CMD first, so CMD must be read
first!
To be really sure an uGuru is present a test read of one or more register
sets should be done.
Reading / Writing
=================
Addressing
----------
The uGuru has a number of different addressing levels. The first addressing
level we will call banks. A bank holds data for one or more sensors. The data
in a bank for a sensor is one or more bytes large.
The number of bytes is fixed for a given bank, you should always read or write
that many bytes, reading / writing more will fail, the results when writing
less then the number of bytes for a given bank are undetermined.
See below for all known bank addresses, numbers of sensors in that bank,
number of bytes data per sensor and contents/meaning of those bytes.
Although both this document and the kernel driver have kept the sensor
terminoligy for the addressing within a bank this is not 100% correct, in
bank 0x24 for example the addressing within the bank selects a PWM output not
a sensor.
Notice that some banks have both a read and a write address this is how the
uGuru determines if a read from or a write to the bank is taking place, thus
when reading you should always use the read address and when writing the
write address. The write address is always one (1) more then the read address.
uGuru ready
-----------
Before you can read from or write to the uGuru you must first put the uGuru
in "ready" mode.
To put the uGuru in ready mode first write 0x00 to DATA and then wait for DATA
to hold 0x09, DATA should read 0x09 within 250 read cycles.
Next CMD _must_ be read and should hold 0xAC, usually CMD will hold 0xAC the
first read but sometimes it takes a while before CMD holds 0xAC and thus it
has to be read a number of times (max 50).
After reading CMD, DATA should hold 0x08 which means that the uGuru is ready
for input. As above DATA will usually hold 0x08 the first read but not always.
This step can be skipped, but it is undetermined what happens if the uGuru has
not yet reported 0x08 at DATA and you proceed with writing a bank address.
Sending bank and sensor addresses to the uGuru
----------------------------------------------
First the uGuru must be in "ready" mode as described above, DATA should hold
0x08 indicating that the uGuru wants input, in this case the bank address.
Next write the bank address to DATA. After the bank address has been written
wait for to DATA to hold 0x08 again indicating that it wants / is ready for
more input (max 250 reads).
Once DATA holds 0x08 again write the sensor address to CMD.
Reading
-------
First send the bank and sensor addresses as described above.
Then for each byte of data you want to read wait for DATA to hold 0x01
which indicates that the uGuru is ready to be read (max 250 reads) and once
DATA holds 0x01 read the byte from CMD.
Once all bytes have been read data will hold 0x09, but there is no reason to
test for this. Notice that the number of bytes is bank address dependent see
above and below.
After completing a successfull read it is advised to put the uGuru back in
ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
algorithm described above will still work.
Writing
-------
First send the bank and sensor addresses as described above.
Then for each byte of data you want to write wait for DATA to hold 0x00
which indicates that the uGuru is ready to be written (max 250 reads) and
once DATA holds 0x00 write the byte to CMD.
Once all bytes have been written wait for DATA to hold 0x01 (max 250 reads)
don't ask why this is the way it is.
Once DATA holds 0x01 read CMD it should hold 0xAC now.
After completing a successfull write it is advised to put the uGuru back in
ready mode, so that it is ready for the next read / write cycle. This way
if your program / driver is unloaded and later loaded again the detection
algorithm described above will still work.
Gotchas
-------
After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have
turned up which do not hold 0x08 at DATA within 250 reads after writing the
bank address. With these versions this happens quite frequent, using larger
timeouts doesn't help, they just go offline for a second or 2, doing some
internal callibration or whatever. Your code should be prepared to handle
this and in case of no response in this specific case just goto sleep for a
while and then retry.
Address Map
===========
Bank 0x20 Alarms (R)
--------------------
This bank contains 0 sensors, iow the sensor address is ignored (but must be
written) just use 0. Bank 0x20 contains 3 bytes:
Byte 0:
This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-7 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
Byte 1:
This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 8-15 of Sensor Bank1, with bit 0
corresponding to sensor 8, 1 to 9, etc.
Byte 2:
This byte holds the alarm flags for sensor 0-5 of Sensor Bank2, with bit 0
corresponding to sensor 0, 1 to 1, etc.
Bank 0x21 Sensor Bank1 Values / Readings (R)
--------------------------------------------
This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
Sensor 0 CPU temp
Sensor 1 SYS temp
Sensor 3 CPU core volt
Sensor 4 DDR volt
Sensor 10 DDR Vtt volt
Sensor 15 PWM temp
Byte 0:
This byte holds the reading from the sensor. Sensors in Bank1 can be both
volt and temp sensors, this is motherboard specific. The uGuru however does
seem to know (be programmed with) what kindoff sensor is attached see Sensor
Bank1 Settings description.
Volt sensors use a linear scale, a reading 0 corresponds with 0 volt and a
reading of 255 with 3494 mV. The sensors for higher voltages however are
connected through a division circuit. The currently known division circuits
in use result in ranges of: 0-4361mV, 0-6248mV or 0-14510mV. 3.3 volt sources
use the 0-4361mV range, 5 volt the 0-6248mV and 12 volt the 0-14510mV .
Temp sensors also use a linear scale, a reading of 0 corresponds with 0 degree
Celsius and a reading of 255 with a reading of 255 degrees Celsius.
Bank 0x22 Sensor Bank1 Settings (R)
Bank 0x23 Sensor Bank1 Settings (W)
-----------------------------------
This bank contains 16 sensors, for each sensor it contains 3 bytes. Each
set of 3 bytes contains the settings for the sensor with the same sensor
address in Bank 0x21 .
Byte 0:
Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured temp is over the warning threshold (RW) *
Bit 1: Give an alarm if measured volt is over the max threshold (RW) **
Bit 2: Give an alarm if measured volt is under the min threshold (RW) **
Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW)
Bit 4: 1 if alarm cause measured temp is over the warning threshold (R)
Bit 5: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is over the max threshold (R)
Bit 6: 1 if alarm cause measured volt is under the min threshold (R)
Bit 7: Volt sensor: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW)
Temp sensor: Shutdown if temp is over the shutdown threshold (RW)
* This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a temp sensor is connected
** This bit is only honored/used by the uGuru if a volt sensor is connected
Note with some trickery this can be used to find out what kinda sensor is
detected see the Linux kernel driver for an example with many comments on
how todo this.
Byte 1:
Temp sensor: warning threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
Volt sensor: min threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
Byte 2:
Temp sensor: shutdown threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
Volt sensor: max threshold (scale as bank 0x21)
Bank 0x24 PWM outputs for FAN's (R)
Bank 0x25 PWM outputs for FAN's (W)
-----------------------------------
This bank contains 3 "sensors", for each sensor it contains 5 bytes.
Sensor 0 usually controls the CPU fan
Sensor 1 usually controls the NB (or chipset for single chip) fan
Sensor 2 usually controls the System fan
Byte 0:
Flag 0x80 to enable control, Fan runs at 100% when disabled.
low nibble (temp)sensor address at bank 0x21 used for control.
Byte 1:
0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when under
low threshold temp (specified in byte 3)
Byte 2:
0-255 = 0-12v (linear), specify voltage at which fan will rotate when above
high threshold temp (specified in byte 4)
Byte 3:
Low threshold temp (scale as bank 0x21)
byte 4:
High threshold temp (scale as bank 0x21)
Bank 0x26 Sensors Bank2 Values / Readings (R)
---------------------------------------------
This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 1 byte.
So far the following sensors are known to be available on all motherboards:
Sensor 0: CPU fan speed
Sensor 1: NB (or chipset for single chip) fan speed
Sensor 2: SYS fan speed
Byte 0:
This byte holds the reading from the sensor. 0-255 = 0-15300 (linear)
Bank 0x27 Sensors Bank2 Settings (R)
Bank 0x28 Sensors Bank2 Settings (W)
------------------------------------
This bank contains 6 sensors (AFAIK), for each sensor it contains 2 bytes.
Byte 0:
Alarm behaviour for the selected sensor. A 1 enables the described behaviour.
Bit 0: Give an alarm if measured rpm is under the min threshold (RW)
Bit 3: Beep if alarm (RW)
Bit 7: Shutdown if alarm persist for more then 4 seconds (RW)
Byte 1:
min threshold (scale as bank 0x26)
Warning for the adventerous
===========================
A word of caution to those who want to experiment and see if they can figure
the voltage / clock programming out, I tried reading and only reading banks
0-0x30 with the reading code used for the sensor banks (0x20-0x28) and this
resulted in a _permanent_ reprogramming of the voltages, luckily I had the
sensors part configured so that it would shutdown my system on any out of spec
voltages which proprably safed my computer (after a reboot I managed to
immediatly enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that
the read/write cycle for the non sensor part is different from the sensor part.

31
Documentation/hwmon/lm70 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
Kernel driver lm70
==================
Supported chip:
* National Semiconductor LM70
Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM70.html
Author:
Kaiwan N Billimoria <kaiwan@designergraphix.com>
Description
-----------
This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM70
temperature sensor.
The LM70 temperature sensor chip supports a single temperature sensor.
It communicates with a host processor (or microcontroller) via an
SPI/Microwire Bus interface.
Communication with the LM70 is simple: when the temperature is to be sensed,
the driver accesses the LM70 using SPI communication: 16 SCLK cycles
comprise the MOSI/MISO loop. At the end of the transfer, the 11-bit 2's
complement digital temperature (sent via the SIO line), is available in the
driver for interpretation. This driver makes use of the kernel's in-core
SPI support.
Thanks to
---------
Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> for mentoring the hwmon-side driver
development.

17
Documentation/hwmon/lm83
View File

@ -7,6 +7,10 @@ Supported chips:
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM83.html
* National Semiconductor LM82
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e
Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
http://www.national.com/pf/LM/LM82.html
Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
@ -15,10 +19,11 @@ Description
-----------
The LM83 is a digital temperature sensor. It senses its own temperature as
well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. It is compatible
with many other devices such as the LM84 and all other ADM1021 clones.
The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84 in that the later can
only sense the temperature of one external diode.
well as the temperature of up to three external diodes. The LM82 is
a stripped down version of the LM83 that only supports one external diode.
Both are compatible with many other devices such as the LM84 and all
other ADM1021 clones. The main difference between the LM83 and the LM84
in that the later can only sense the temperature of one external diode.
Using the adm1021 driver for a LM83 should work, but only two temperatures
will be reported instead of four.
@ -30,12 +35,16 @@ contact us. Note that the LM90 can easily be misdetected as a LM83.
Confirmed motherboards:
SBS P014
SBS PSL09
Unconfirmed motherboards:
Gigabyte GA-8IK1100
Iwill MPX2
Soltek SL-75DRV5
The LM82 is confirmed to have been found on most AMD Geode reference
designs and test platforms.
The driver has been successfully tested by Magnus Forsström, who I'd
like to thank here. More testers will be of course welcome.

102
Documentation/hwmon/smsc47m192 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
Kernel driver smsc47m192
========================
Supported chips:
* SMSC LPC47M192 and LPC47M997
Prefix: 'smsc47m192'
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2d
Datasheet: The datasheet for LPC47M192 is publicly available from
http://www.smsc.com/
The LPC47M997 is compatible for hardware monitoring.
Author: Hartmut Rick <linux@rick.claranet.de>
Special thanks to Jean Delvare for careful checking
of the code and many helpful comments and suggestions.
Description
-----------
This driver implements support for the hardware sensor capabilities
of the SMSC LPC47M192 and LPC47M997 Super-I/O chips.
These chips support 3 temperature channels and 8 voltage inputs
as well as CPU voltage VID input.
They do also have fan monitoring and control capabilities, but the
these features are accessed via ISA bus and are not supported by this
driver. Use the 'smsc47m1' driver for fan monitoring and control.
Voltages and temperatures are measured by an 8-bit ADC, the resolution
of the temperatures is 1 bit per degree C.
Voltages are scaled such that the nominal voltage corresponds to
192 counts, i.e. 3/4 of the full range. Thus the available range for
each voltage channel is 0V ... 255/192*(nominal voltage), the resolution
is 1 bit per (nominal voltage)/192.
Both voltage and temperature values are scaled by 1000, the sys files
show voltages in mV and temperatures in units of 0.001 degC.
The +12V analog voltage input channel (in4_input) is multiplexed with
bit 4 of the encoded CPU voltage. This means that you either get
a +12V voltage measurement or a 5 bit CPU VID, but not both.
The default setting is to use the pin as 12V input, and use only 4 bit VID.
This driver assumes that the information in the configuration register
is correct, i.e. that the BIOS has updated the configuration if
the motherboard has this input wired to VID4.
The temperature and voltage readings are updated once every 1.5 seconds.
Reading them more often repeats the same values.
sysfs interface
---------------
in0_input - +2.5V voltage input
in1_input - CPU voltage input (nominal 2.25V)
in2_input - +3.3V voltage input
in3_input - +5V voltage input
in4_input - +12V voltage input (may be missing if used as VID4)
in5_input - Vcc voltage input (nominal 3.3V)
This is the supply voltage of the sensor chip itself.
in6_input - +1.5V voltage input
in7_input - +1.8V voltage input
in[0-7]_min,
in[0-7]_max - lower and upper alarm thresholds for in[0-7]_input reading
All voltages are read and written in mV.
in[0-7]_alarm - alarm flags for voltage inputs
These files read '1' in case of alarm, '0' otherwise.
temp1_input - chip temperature measured by on-chip diode
temp[2-3]_input - temperature measured by external diodes (one of these would
typically be wired to the diode inside the CPU)
temp[1-3]_min,
temp[1-3]_max - lower and upper alarm thresholds for temperatures
temp[1-3]_offset - temperature offset registers
The chip adds the offsets stored in these registers to
the corresponding temperature readings.
Note that temp1 and temp2 offsets share the same register,
they cannot both be different from zero at the same time.
Writing a non-zero number to one of them will reset the other
offset to zero.
All temperatures and offsets are read and written in
units of 0.001 degC.
temp[1-3]_alarm - alarm flags for temperature inputs, '1' in case of alarm,
'0' otherwise.
temp[2-3]_input_fault - diode fault flags for temperature inputs 2 and 3.
A fault is detected if the two pins for the corresponding
sensor are open or shorted, or any of the two is shorted
to ground or Vcc. '1' indicates a diode fault.
cpu0_vid - CPU voltage as received from the CPU
vrm - CPU VID standard used for decoding CPU voltage
The *_min, *_max, *_offset and vrm files can be read and
written, all others are read-only.

276
Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
View File

@ -3,15 +3,15 @@ Naming and data format standards for sysfs files
The libsensors library offers an interface to the raw sensors data
through the sysfs interface. See libsensors documentation and source for
more further information. As of writing this document, libsensors
(from lm_sensors 2.8.3) is heavily chip-dependant. Adding or updating
further information. As of writing this document, libsensors
(from lm_sensors 2.8.3) is heavily chip-dependent. Adding or updating
support for any given chip requires modifying the library's code.
This is because libsensors was written for the procfs interface
older kernel modules were using, which wasn't standardized enough.
Recent versions of libsensors (from lm_sensors 2.8.2 and later) have
support for the sysfs interface, though.
The new sysfs interface was designed to be as chip-independant as
The new sysfs interface was designed to be as chip-independent as
possible.
Note that motherboards vary widely in the connections to sensor chips.
@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ range using external resistors. Since the values of these resistors
can change from motherboard to motherboard, the conversions cannot be
hard coded into the driver and have to be done in user space.
For this reason, even if we aim at a chip-independant libsensors, it will
For this reason, even if we aim at a chip-independent libsensors, it will
still require a configuration file (e.g. /etc/sensors.conf) for proper
values conversion, labeling of inputs and hiding of unused inputs.
@ -39,15 +39,16 @@ If you are developing a userspace application please send us feedback on
this standard.
Note that this standard isn't completely established yet, so it is subject
to changes, even important ones. One more reason to use the library instead
of accessing sysfs files directly.
to changes. If you are writing a new hardware monitoring driver those
features can't seem to fit in this interface, please contact us with your
extension proposal. Keep in mind that backward compatibility must be
preserved.
Each chip gets its own directory in the sysfs /sys/devices tree. To
find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the symlinks from
/sys/i2c/devices/
find all sensor chips, it is easier to follow the device symlinks from
/sys/class/hwmon/hwmon*.
All sysfs values are fixed point numbers. To get the true value of some
of the values, you should divide by the specified value.
All sysfs values are fixed point numbers.
There is only one value per file, unlike the older /proc specification.
The common scheme for files naming is: <type><number>_<item>. Usual
@ -69,28 +70,40 @@ to cause an alarm) is chip-dependent.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
[0-*] denotes any positive number starting from 0
[1-*] denotes any positive number starting from 1
RO read only value
RW read/write value
Read/write values may be read-only for some chips, depending on the
hardware implementation.
All entries are optional, and should only be created in a given driver
if the chip has the feature.
************
* Voltages *
************
in[0-8]_min Voltage min value.
in[0-*]_min Voltage min value.
Unit: millivolt
Read/Write
RW
in[0-8]_max Voltage max value.
in[0-*]_max Voltage max value.
Unit: millivolt
Read/Write
RW
in[0-8]_input Voltage input value.
in[0-*]_input Voltage input value.
Unit: millivolt
Read only
RO
Voltage measured on the chip pin.
Actual voltage depends on the scaling resistors on the
motherboard, as recommended in the chip datasheet.
This varies by chip and by motherboard.
Because of this variation, values are generally NOT scaled
by the chip driver, and must be done by the application.
However, some drivers (notably lm87 and via686a)
do scale, with various degrees of success.
do scale, because of internal resistors built into a chip.
These drivers will output the actual voltage.
Typical usage:
@ -104,58 +117,72 @@ in[0-8]_input Voltage input value.
in7_* varies
in8_* varies
cpu[0-1]_vid CPU core reference voltage.
cpu[0-*]_vid CPU core reference voltage.
Unit: millivolt
Read only.
RO
Not always correct.
vrm Voltage Regulator Module version number.
Read only.
Two digit number, first is major version, second is
minor version.
RW (but changing it should no more be necessary)
Originally the VRM standard version multiplied by 10, but now
an arbitrary number, as not all standards have a version
number.
Affects the way the driver calculates the CPU core reference
voltage from the vid pins.
Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with voltages.
********
* Fans *
********
fan[1-3]_min Fan minimum value
fan[1-*]_min Fan minimum value
Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
Read/Write.
RW
fan[1-3]_input Fan input value.
fan[1-*]_input Fan input value.
Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
Read only.
RO
fan[1-3]_div Fan divisor.
fan[1-*]_div Fan divisor.
Integer value in powers of two (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128).
RW
Some chips only support values 1, 2, 4 and 8.
Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which
affects the measurable speed range, not the read value.
Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with fans.
*******
* PWM *
*******
pwm[1-3] Pulse width modulation fan control.
pwm[1-*] Pulse width modulation fan control.
Integer value in the range 0 to 255
Read/Write
RW
255 is max or 100%.
pwm[1-3]_enable
pwm[1-*]_enable
Switch PWM on and off.
Not always present even if fan*_pwm is.
0 to turn off
1 to turn on in manual mode
2 to turn on in automatic mode
Read/Write
0: turn off
1: turn on in manual mode
2+: turn on in automatic mode
Check individual chip documentation files for automatic mode details.
RW
pwm[1-*]_mode
0: DC mode
1: PWM mode
RW
pwm[1-*]_auto_channels_temp
Select which temperature channels affect this PWM output in
auto mode. Bitfield, 1 is temp1, 2 is temp2, 4 is temp3 etc...
Which values are possible depend on the chip used.
RW
pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_pwm
pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp
@ -163,6 +190,7 @@ pwm[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
to PWM output channels.
RW
OR
@ -172,50 +200,57 @@ temp[1-*]_auto_point[1-*]_temp_hyst
Define the PWM vs temperature curve. Number of trip points is
chip-dependent. Use this for chips which associate trip points
to temperature channels.
RW
****************
* Temperatures *
****************
temp[1-3]_type Sensor type selection.
temp[1-*]_type Sensor type selection.
Integers 1 to 4 or thermistor Beta value (typically 3435)
Read/Write.
RW
1: PII/Celeron Diode
2: 3904 transistor
3: thermal diode
4: thermistor (default/unknown Beta)
Not all types are supported by all chips
temp[1-4]_max Temperature max value.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Read/Write value.
temp[1-*]_max Temperature max value.
Unit: millidegree Celsius (or millivolt, see below)
RW
temp[1-3]_min Temperature min value.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Read/Write value.
temp[1-*]_min Temperature min value.
Unit: millidegree Celsius
RW
temp[1-3]_max_hyst
temp[1-*]_max_hyst
Temperature hysteresis value for max limit.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Unit: millidegree Celsius
Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
from the max value.
Read/Write value.
RW
temp[1-4]_input Temperature input value.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Read only value.
temp[1-*]_input Temperature input value.
Unit: millidegree Celsius
RO
temp[1-4]_crit Temperature critical value, typically greater than
temp[1-*]_crit Temperature critical value, typically greater than
corresponding temp_max values.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Read/Write value.
Unit: millidegree Celsius
RW
temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
temp[1-*]_crit_hyst
Temperature hysteresis value for critical limit.
Unit: millidegree Celcius
Unit: millidegree Celsius
Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta
from the critical value.
RW
temp[1-4]_offset
Temperature offset which is added to the temperature reading
by the chip.
Unit: millidegree Celsius
Read/Write value.
If there are multiple temperature sensors, temp1_* is
@ -225,6 +260,17 @@ temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
itself, for example the thermal diode inside the CPU or
a thermistor nearby.
Some chips measure temperature using external thermistors and an ADC, and
report the temperature measurement as a voltage. Converting this voltage
back to a temperature (or the other way around for limits) requires
mathematical functions not available in the kernel, so the conversion
must occur in user space. For these chips, all temp* files described
above should contain values expressed in millivolt instead of millidegree
Celsius. In other words, such temperature channels are handled as voltage
channels by the driver.
Also see the Alarms section for status flags associated with temperatures.
************
* Currents *
@ -233,25 +279,88 @@ temp[1-2]_crit_hyst
Note that no known chip provides current measurements as of writing,
so this part is theoretical, so to say.
curr[1-n]_max Current max value
curr[1-*]_max Current max value
Unit: milliampere
Read/Write.
RW
curr[1-n]_min Current min value.
curr[1-*]_min Current min value.
Unit: milliampere
Read/Write.
RW
curr[1-n]_input Current input value
curr[1-*]_input Current input value
Unit: milliampere
Read only.
RO
*********
* Other *
*********
**********
* Alarms *
**********
Each channel or limit may have an associated alarm file, containing a
boolean value. 1 means than an alarm condition exists, 0 means no alarm.
Usually a given chip will either use channel-related alarms, or
limit-related alarms, not both. The driver should just reflect the hardware
implementation.
in[0-*]_alarm
fan[1-*]_alarm
temp[1-*]_alarm
Channel alarm
0: no alarm
1: alarm
RO
OR
in[0-*]_min_alarm
in[0-*]_max_alarm
fan[1-*]_min_alarm
temp[1-*]_min_alarm
temp[1-*]_max_alarm
temp[1-*]_crit_alarm
Limit alarm
0: no alarm
1: alarm
RO
Each input channel may have an associated fault file. This can be used
to notify open diodes, unconnected fans etc. where the hardware
supports it. When this boolean has value 1, the measurement for that
channel should not be trusted.
in[0-*]_input_fault
fan[1-*]_input_fault
temp[1-*]_input_fault
Input fault condition
0: no fault occured
1: fault condition
RO
Some chips also offer the possibility to get beeped when an alarm occurs:
beep_enable Master beep enable
0: no beeps
1: beeps
RW
in[0-*]_beep
fan[1-*]_beep
temp[1-*]_beep
Channel beep
0: disable
1: enable
RW
In theory, a chip could provide per-limit beep masking, but no such chip
was seen so far.
Old drivers provided a different, non-standard interface to alarms and
beeps. These interface files are deprecated, but will be kept around
for compatibility reasons:
alarms Alarm bitmask.
Read only.
RO
Integer representation of one to four bytes.
A '1' bit means an alarm.
Chips should be programmed for 'comparator' mode so that
@ -259,35 +368,26 @@ alarms Alarm bitmask.
if it is still valid.
Generally a direct representation of a chip's internal
alarm registers; there is no standard for the position
of individual bits.
of individual bits. For this reason, the use of this
interface file for new drivers is discouraged. Use
individual *_alarm and *_fault files instead.
Bits are defined in kernel/include/sensors.h.
alarms_in Alarm bitmask relative to in (voltage) channels
Read only
A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to in0 and so on
Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
alarms_fan Alarm bitmask relative to fan channels
Read only
A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to fan1 and so on
Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
alarms_temp Alarm bitmask relative to temp (temperature) channels
Read only
A '1' bit means an alarm, LSB corresponds to temp1 and so on
Prefered to 'alarms' for newer chips
beep_enable Beep/interrupt enable
0 to disable.
1 to enable.
Read/Write
beep_mask Bitmask for beep.
Same format as 'alarms' with the same bit locations.
Read/Write
Same format as 'alarms' with the same bit locations,
use discouraged for the same reason. Use individual
*_beep files instead.
RW
*********
* Other *
*********
eeprom Raw EEPROM data in binary form.
Read only.
RO
pec Enable or disable PEC (SMBus only)
Read/Write
0: disable
1: enable
RW

17
Documentation/hwmon/userspace-tools
View File

@ -6,31 +6,32 @@ voltages, fans speed). They are often connected through an I2C bus, but some
are also connected directly through the ISA bus.
The kernel drivers make the data from the sensor chips available in the /sys
virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display or set or the
data in a more friendly manner.
virtual filesystem. Userspace tools are then used to display the measured
values or configure the chips in a more friendly manner.
Lm-sensors
----------
Core set of utilites that will allow you to obtain health information,
Core set of utilities that will allow you to obtain health information,
setup monitoring limits etc. You can get them on their homepage
http://www.lm-sensors.nu/ or as a package from your Linux distribution.
If from website:
Get lmsensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace
part, so compile with "make user_install" target.
Get lm-sensors from project web site. Please note, you need only userspace
part, so compile with "make user" and install with "make user_install".
General hints to get things working:
0) get lm-sensors userspace utils
1) compile all drivers in I2C section as modules in your kernel
1) compile all drivers in I2C and Hardware Monitoring sections as modules
in your kernel
2) run sensors-detect script, it will tell you what modules you need to load.
3) load them and run "sensors" command, you should see some results.
4) fix sensors.conf, labels, limits, fan divisors
5) if any more problems consult FAQ, or documentation
Other utilites
--------------
Other utilities
---------------
If you want some graphical indicators of system health look for applications
like: gkrellm, ksensors, xsensors, wmtemp, wmsensors, wmgtemp, ksysguardd,

113
Documentation/hwmon/w83791d Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
Kernel driver w83791d
=====================
Supported chips:
* Winbond W83791D
Prefix: 'w83791d'
Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83791Da.pdf
Author: Charles Spirakis <bezaur@gmail.com>
This driver was derived from the w83781d.c and w83792d.c source files.
Credits:
w83781d.c:
Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl>,
Philip Edelbrock <phil@netroedge.com>,
and Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com>
w83792d.c:
Chunhao Huang <DZShen@Winbond.com.tw>,
Rudolf Marek <r.marek@sh.cvut.cz>
Module Parameters
-----------------
* init boolean
(default 0)
Use 'init=1' to have the driver do extra software initializations.
The default behavior is to do the minimum initialization possible
and depend on the BIOS to properly setup the chip. If you know you
have a w83791d and you're having problems, try init=1 before trying
reset=1.
* reset boolean
(default 0)
Use 'reset=1' to reset the chip (via index 0x40, bit 7). The default
behavior is no chip reset to preserve BIOS settings.
* force_subclients=bus,caddr,saddr,saddr
This is used to force the i2c addresses for subclients of
a certain chip. Example usage is `force_subclients=0,0x2f,0x4a,0x4b'
to force the subclients of chip 0x2f on bus 0 to i2c addresses
0x4a and 0x4b.
Description
-----------
This driver implements support for the Winbond W83791D chip.
Detection of the chip can sometimes be foiled because it can be in an
internal state that allows no clean access (Bank with ID register is not
currently selected). If you know the address of the chip, use a 'force'
parameter; this will put it into a more well-behaved state first.
The driver implements three temperature sensors, five fan rotation speed
sensors, and ten voltage sensors.
Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1
degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when
the temperature gets higher than the Overtemperature Shutdown value; it stays
on until the temperature falls below the Hysteresis value.
Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
readings can be divided by a programmable divider (1, 2, 4, 8 for fan 1/2/3
and 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128 for fan 4/5) to give the readings more
range or accuracy.
Voltage sensors (also known as IN sensors) report their values in millivolts.
An alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum
or maximum limit.
Alarms are provided as output from a "realtime status register". The
following bits are defined:
bit - alarm on:
0 - Vcore
1 - VINR0
2 - +3.3VIN
3 - 5VDD
4 - temp1
5 - temp2
6 - fan1
7 - fan2
8 - +12VIN
9 - -12VIN
10 - -5VIN
11 - fan3
12 - chassis
13 - temp3
14 - VINR1
15 - reserved
16 - tart1
17 - tart2
18 - tart3
19 - VSB
20 - VBAT
21 - fan4
22 - fan5
23 - reserved
When an alarm goes off, you can be warned by a beeping signal through your
computer speaker. It is possible to enable all beeping globally, or only
the beeping for some alarms.
The driver only reads the chip values each 3 seconds; reading them more
often will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
W83791D TODO:
---------------
Provide a patch for per-file alarms as discussed on the mailing list
Provide a patch for smart-fan control (still need appropriate motherboard/fans)

3
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
View File

@ -21,8 +21,7 @@ Authors:
Module Parameters
-----------------
* force_addr: int
Forcibly enable the ICH at the given address. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
None.
Description

2
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-nforce2
View File

@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ Supported adapters:
* nForce3 250Gb MCP 10de:00E4
* nForce4 MCP 10de:0052
* nForce4 MCP-04 10de:0034
* nForce4 MCP51 10de:0264
* nForce4 MCP55 10de:0368
Datasheet: not publically available, but seems to be similar to the
AMD-8111 SMBus 2.0 adapter.

51
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-ocores Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
Kernel driver i2c-ocores
Supported adapters:
* OpenCores.org I2C controller by Richard Herveille (see datasheet link)
Datasheet: http://www.opencores.org/projects.cgi/web/i2c/overview
Author: Peter Korsgaard <jacmet@sunsite.dk>
Description
-----------
i2c-ocores is an i2c bus driver for the OpenCores.org I2C controller
IP core by Richard Herveille.
Usage
-----
i2c-ocores uses the platform bus, so you need to provide a struct
platform_device with the base address and interrupt number. The
dev.platform_data of the device should also point to a struct
ocores_i2c_platform_data (see linux/i2c-ocores.h) describing the
distance between registers and the input clock speed.
E.G. something like:
static struct resource ocores_resources[] = {
[0] = {
.start = MYI2C_BASEADDR,
.end = MYI2C_BASEADDR + 8,
.flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
},
[1] = {
.start = MYI2C_IRQ,
.end = MYI2C_IRQ,
.flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
},
};
static struct ocores_i2c_platform_data myi2c_data = {
.regstep = 2, /* two bytes between registers */
.clock_khz = 50000, /* input clock of 50MHz */
};
static struct platform_device myi2c = {
.name = "ocores-i2c",
.dev = {
.platform_data = &myi2c_data,
},
.num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(ocores_resources),
.resource = ocores_resources,
};

40
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-piix4
View File

@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ Supported adapters:
Datasheet: Publicly available at the Intel website
* ServerWorks OSB4, CSB5, CSB6 and HT-1000 southbridges
Datasheet: Only available via NDA from ServerWorks
* ATI IXP southbridges IXP200, IXP300, IXP400
Datasheet: Not publicly available
* Standard Microsystems (SMSC) SLC90E66 (Victory66) southbridge
Datasheet: Publicly available at the SMSC website http://www.smsc.com
@ -21,8 +23,6 @@ Module Parameters
Forcibly enable the PIIX4. DANGEROUS!
* force_addr: int
Forcibly enable the PIIX4 at the given address. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS!
* fix_hstcfg: int
Fix config register. Needed on some boards (Force CPCI735).
Description
@ -63,10 +63,36 @@ The PIIX4E is just an new version of the PIIX4; it is supported as well.
The PIIX/PIIX3 does not implement an SMBus or I2C bus, so you can't use
this driver on those mainboards.
The ServerWorks Southbridges, the Intel 440MX, and the Victory766 are
The ServerWorks Southbridges, the Intel 440MX, and the Victory66 are
identical to the PIIX4 in I2C/SMBus support.
A few OSB4 southbridges are known to be misconfigured by the BIOS. In this
case, you have you use the fix_hstcfg module parameter. Do not use it
unless you know you have to, because in some cases it also breaks
configuration on southbridges that don't need it.
If you own Force CPCI735 motherboard or other OSB4 based systems you may need
to change the SMBus Interrupt Select register so the SMBus controller uses
the SMI mode.
1) Use lspci command and locate the PCI device with the SMBus controller:
00:0f.0 ISA bridge: ServerWorks OSB4 South Bridge (rev 4f)
The line may vary for different chipsets. Please consult the driver source
for all possible PCI ids (and lspci -n to match them). Lets assume the
device is located at 00:0f.0.
2) Now you just need to change the value in 0xD2 register. Get it first with
command: lspci -xxx -s 00:0f.0
If the value is 0x3 then you need to change it to 0x1
setpci -s 00:0f.0 d2.b=1
Please note that you don't need to do that in all cases, just when the SMBus is
not working properly.
Hardware-specific issues
------------------------
This driver will refuse to load on IBM systems with an Intel PIIX4 SMBus.
Some of these machines have an RFID EEPROM (24RF08) connected to the SMBus,
which can easily get corrupted due to a state machine bug. These are mostly
Thinkpad laptops, but desktop systems may also be affected. We have no list
of all affected systems, so the only safe solution was to prevent access to
the SMBus on all IBM systems (detected using DMI data.)
For additional information, read:
http://www2.lm-sensors.nu/~lm78/cvs/lm_sensors2/README.thinkpad

19
Documentation/i2c/busses/scx200_acb
View File

@ -2,14 +2,31 @@ Kernel driver scx200_acb
Author: Christer Weinigel <wingel@nano-system.com>
The driver supersedes the older, never merged driver named i2c-nscacb.
Module Parameters
-----------------
* base: int
* base: up to 4 ints
Base addresses for the ACCESS.bus controllers on SCx200 and SC1100 devices
By default the driver uses two base addresses 0x820 and 0x840.
If you want only one base address, specify the second as 0 so as to
override this default.
Description
-----------
Enable the use of the ACCESS.bus controller on the Geode SCx200 and
SC1100 processors and the CS5535 and CS5536 Geode companion devices.
Device-specific notes
---------------------
The SC1100 WRAP boards are known to use base addresses 0x810 and 0x820.
If the scx200_acb driver is built into the kernel, add the following
parameter to your boot command line:
scx200_acb.base=0x810,0x820
If the scx200_acb driver is built as a module, add the following line to
the file /etc/modprobe.conf instead:
options scx200_acb base=0x810,0x820

208
Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
MEMORY ATTRIBUTE ALIASING ON IA-64
Bjorn Helgaas
<bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
May 4, 2006
MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
Itanium supports several attributes for virtual memory references.
The attribute is part of the virtual translation, i.e., it is
contained in the TLB entry. The ones of most interest to the Linux
kernel are:
WB Write-back (cacheable)
UC Uncacheable
WC Write-coalescing
System memory typically uses the WB attribute. The UC attribute is
used for memory-mapped I/O devices. The WC attribute is uncacheable
like UC is, but writes may be delayed and combined to increase
performance for things like frame buffers.
The Itanium architecture requires that we avoid accessing the same
page with both a cacheable mapping and an uncacheable mapping[1].
The design of the chipset determines which attributes are supported
on which regions of the address space. For example, some chipsets
support either WB or UC access to main memory, while others support
only WB access.
MEMORY MAP
Platform firmware describes the physical memory map and the
supported attributes for each region. At boot-time, the kernel uses
the EFI GetMemoryMap() interface. ACPI can also describe memory
devices and the attributes they support, but Linux/ia64 currently
doesn't use this information.
The kernel uses the efi_memmap table returned from GetMemoryMap() to
learn the attributes supported by each region of physical address
space. Unfortunately, this table does not completely describe the
address space because some machines omit some or all of the MMIO
regions from the map.
The kernel maintains another table, kern_memmap, which describes the
memory Linux is actually using and the attribute for each region.
This contains only system memory; it does not contain MMIO space.
The kern_memmap table typically contains only a subset of the system
memory described by the efi_memmap. Linux/ia64 can't use all memory
in the system because of constraints imposed by the identity mapping
scheme.
The efi_memmap table is preserved unmodified because the original
boot-time information is required for kexec.
KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
Linux/ia64 identity mappings are done with large pages, currently
either 16MB or 64MB, referred to as "granules." Cacheable mappings
are speculative[2], so the processor can read any location in the
page at any time, independent of the programmer's intentions. This
means that to avoid attribute aliasing, Linux can create a cacheable
identity mapping only when the entire granule supports cacheable
access.
Therefore, kern_memmap contains only full granule-sized regions that
can referenced safely by an identity mapping.
Uncacheable mappings are not speculative, so the processor will
generate UC accesses only to locations explicitly referenced by
software. This allows UC identity mappings to cover granules that
are only partially populated, or populated with a combination of UC
and WB regions.
USER MAPPINGS
User mappings are typically done with 16K or 64K pages. The smaller
page size allows more flexibility because only 16K or 64K has to be
homogeneous with respect to memory attributes.
POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
There are several ways the kernel creates new mappings:
mmap of /dev/mem
This uses remap_pfn_range(), which creates user mappings. These
mappings may be either WB or UC. If the region being mapped
happens to be in kern_memmap, meaning that it may also be mapped
by a kernel identity mapping, the user mapping must use the same
attribute as the kernel mapping.
If the region is not in kern_memmap, the user mapping should use
an attribute reported as being supported in the EFI memory map.
Since the EFI memory map does not describe MMIO on some
machines, this should use an uncacheable mapping as a fallback.
mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
This is very similar to mmap of /dev/mem, except that legacy_mem
only allows mmap of the one megabyte "legacy MMIO" area for a
specific PCI bus. Typically this is the first megabyte of
physical address space, but it may be different on machines with
several VGA devices.
"X" uses this to access VGA frame buffers. Using legacy_mem
rather than /dev/mem allows multiple instances of X to talk to
different VGA cards.
The /dev/mem mmap constraints apply.
However, since this is for mapping legacy MMIO space, WB access
does not make sense. This matters on machines without legacy
VGA support: these machines may have WB memory for the entire
first megabyte (or even the entire first granule).
On these machines, we could mmap legacy_mem as WB, which would
be safe in terms of attribute aliasing, but X has no way of
knowing that it is accessing regular memory, not a frame buffer,
so the kernel should fail the mmap rather than doing it with WB.
read/write of /dev/mem
This uses copy_from_user(), which implicitly uses a kernel
identity mapping. This is obviously safe for things in
kern_memmap.
There may be corner cases of things that are not in kern_memmap,
but could be accessed this way. For example, registers in MMIO
space are not in kern_memmap, but could be accessed with a UC
mapping. This would not cause attribute aliasing. But
registers typically can be accessed only with four-byte or
eight-byte accesses, and the copy_from_user() path doesn't allow
any control over the access size, so this would be dangerous.
ioremap()
This returns a kernel identity mapping for use inside the
kernel.
If the region is in kern_memmap, we should use the attribute
specified there. Otherwise, if the EFI memory map reports that
the entire granule supports WB, we should use that (granules
that are partially reserved or occupied by firmware do not appear
in kern_memmap). Otherwise, we should use a UC mapping.
PAST PROBLEM CASES
mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
The EFI memory map may not report these MMIO regions.
These must be allowed so that X will work. This means that
when the EFI memory map is incomplete, every /dev/mem mmap must
succeed. It may create either WB or UC user mappings, depending
on whether the region is in kern_memmap or the EFI memory map.
mmap of 0x0-0xA0000 /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
See https://bugzilla.novell.com/show_bug.cgi?id=140858.
The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
0x00000-0x9FFFF WB only
0xA0000-0xBFFFF UC only (VGA frame buffer)
0xC0000-0xFFFFF WB only
This mmap is done with user pages, not kernel identity mappings,
so it is safe to use WB mappings.
The kernel VGA driver may ioremap the VGA frame buffer at 0xA0000,
which will use a granule-sized UC mapping covering 0-0xFFFFF. This
granule covers some WB-only memory, but since UC is non-speculative,
the processor will never generate an uncacheable reference to the
WB-only areas unless the driver explicitly touches them.
mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
If the EFI memory map reports this entire range as WB, there
is no VGA MMIO hole, and the mmap should fail or be done with
a WB mapping.
There's no easy way for X to determine whether the 0xA0000-0xBFFFF
region is a frame buffer or just memory, so I think it's best to
just fail this mmap request rather than using a WB mapping. As
far as I know, there's no need to map legacy_mem with WB
mappings.
Otherwise, a UC mapping of the entire region is probably safe.
The VGA hole means the region will not be in kern_memmap. The
HP sx1000 chipset doesn't support UC access to the memory surrounding
the VGA hole, but X doesn't need that area anyway and should not
reference it.
mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
0x00000-0xFFFFF WB only (no VGA MMIO hole)
This is a special case of the previous case, and the mmap should
fail for the same reason as above.
NOTES
[1] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.1.
[2] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.6.

12
Documentation/infiniband/ipoib.txt
View File

@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
IP OVER INFINIBAND
The ib_ipoib driver is an implementation of the IP over InfiniBand
protocol as specified by the latest Internet-Drafts issued by the
IETF ipoib working group. It is a "native" implementation in the
sense of setting the interface type to ARPHRD_INFINIBAND and the
hardware address length to 20 (earlier proprietary implementations
protocol as specified by RFC 4391 and 4392, issued by the IETF ipoib
working group. It is a "native" implementation in the sense of
setting the interface type to ARPHRD_INFINIBAND and the hardware
address length to 20 (earlier proprietary implementations
masqueraded to the kernel as ethernet interfaces).
Partitions and P_Keys
@ -53,3 +53,7 @@ References
IETF IP over InfiniBand (ipoib) Working Group
http://ietf.org/html.charters/ipoib-charter.html
Transmission of IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) (RFC 4391)
http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4391.txt
IP over InfiniBand (IPoIB) Architecture (RFC 4392)
http://ietf.org/rfc/rfc4392.txt

2
Documentation/ioctl-number.txt
View File

@ -85,7 +85,9 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments
<mailto:maassen@uni-freiburg.de>
'C' all linux/soundcard.h
'D' all asm-s390/dasd.h
'E' all linux/input.h
'F' all linux/fb.h
'H' all linux/hiddev.h
'I' all linux/isdn.h
'J' 00-1F drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h
'K' all linux/kd.h

7
Documentation/isdn/README.gigaset
View File

@ -124,7 +124,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
You can use some configuration tool of your distribution to configure this
"modem" or configure pppd/wvdial manually. There are some example ppp
configuration files and chat scripts in the gigaset-VERSION/ppp directory.
configuration files and chat scripts in the gigaset-VERSION/ppp directory
in the driver packages from http://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x/.
Please note that the USB drivers are not able to change the state of the
control lines (the M105 driver can be configured to use some undocumented
control requests, if you really need the control lines, though). This means
@ -164,8 +165,8 @@ GigaSet 307x Device Driver
If you want both of these at once, you are out of luck.
You can also use /sys/module/<name>/parameters/cidmode for changing
the CID mode setting (<name> is usb_gigaset or bas_gigaset).
You can also use /sys/class/tty/ttyGxy/cidmode for changing the CID mode
setting (ttyGxy is ttyGU0 or ttyGB0).
3. Troubleshooting

386
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
View File

@ -1,155 +1,325 @@
Documentation for kdump - the kexec-based crash dumping solution
================================================================
Documentation for Kdump - The kexec-based Crash Dumping Solution
================================================================
DESIGN
======
This document includes overview, setup and installation, and analysis
information.
Kdump uses kexec to reboot to a second kernel whenever a dump needs to be
taken. This second kernel is booted with very little memory. The first kernel
reserves the section of memory that the second kernel uses. This ensures that
on-going DMA from the first kernel does not corrupt the second kernel.
Overview
========
All the necessary information about Core image is encoded in ELF format and
stored in reserved area of memory before crash. Physical address of start of
ELF header is passed to new kernel through command line parameter elfcorehdr=.
Kdump uses kexec to quickly boot to a dump-capture kernel whenever a
dump of the system kernel's memory needs to be taken (for example, when
the system panics). The system kernel's memory image is preserved across
the reboot and is accessible to the dump-capture kernel.
On i386, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot, irrespective
of where the kernel loads. Hence, this region is backed up by kexec just before
rebooting into the new kernel.
You can use common Linux commands, such as cp and scp, to copy the
memory image to a dump file on the local disk, or across the network to
a remote system.
In the second kernel, "old memory" can be accessed in two ways.
Kdump and kexec are currently supported on the x86, x86_64, and ppc64
architectures.
- The first one is through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility
can read the device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is raw
dump of memory and analysis/capture tool should be intelligent enough to
determine where to look for the right information. ELF headers (elfcorehdr=)
can become handy here.
When the system kernel boots, it reserves a small section of memory for
the dump-capture kernel. This ensures that ongoing Direct Memory Access
(DMA) from the system kernel does not corrupt the dump-capture kernel.
The kexec -p command loads the dump-capture kernel into this reserved
memory.
- The second interface is through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF
format file which can be written out using any file copy command
(cp, scp, etc). Further, gdb can be used to perform limited debugging on
the dump file. This method ensures methods ensure that there is correct
ordering of the dump pages (corresponding to the first 640 KB that has been
relocated).
On x86 machines, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot,
regardless of where the kernel loads. Therefore, kexec backs up this
region just before rebooting into the dump-capture kernel.
SETUP
=====
All of the necessary information about the system kernel's core image is
encoded in the ELF format, and stored in a reserved area of memory
before a crash. The physical address of the start of the ELF header is
passed to the dump-capture kernel through the elfcorehdr= boot
parameter.
1) Download the upstream kexec-tools userspace package from
http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz.
With the dump-capture kernel, you can access the memory image, or "old
memory," in two ways:
Apply the latest consolidated kdump patch on top of kexec-tools-1.101
from http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/. This arrangment has been made
till all the userspace patches supporting kdump are integrated with
upstream kexec-tools userspace.
- Through a /dev/oldmem device interface. A capture utility can read the
device file and write out the memory in raw format. This is a raw dump
of memory. Analysis and capture tools must be intelligent enough to
determine where to look for the right information.
2) Download and build the appropriate (2.6.13-rc1 onwards) vanilla kernels.
Two kernels need to be built in order to get this feature working.
Following are the steps to properly configure the two kernels specific
to kexec and kdump features:
- Through /proc/vmcore. This exports the dump as an ELF-format file that
you can write out using file copy commands such as cp or scp. Further,
you can use analysis tools such as the GNU Debugger (GDB) and the Crash
tool to debug the dump file. This method ensures that the dump pages are
correctly ordered.
Setup and Installation
======================
Install kexec-tools and the Kdump patch
---------------------------------------
1) Login as the root user.
2) Download the kexec-tools user-space package from the following URL:
http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
3) Unpack the tarball with the tar command, as follows:
tar xvpzf kexec-tools-1.101.tar.gz
4) Download the latest consolidated Kdump patch from the following URL:
http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/
(This location is being used until all the user-space Kdump patches
are integrated with the kexec-tools package.)
5) Change to the kexec-tools-1.101 directory, as follows:
cd kexec-tools-1.101
6) Apply the consolidated patch to the kexec-tools-1.101 source tree
with the patch command, as follows. (Modify the path to the downloaded
patch as necessary.)
patch -p1 < /path-to-kdump-patch/kexec-tools-1.101-kdump.patch
7) Configure the package, as follows:
./configure
8) Compile the package, as follows:
make
9) Install the package, as follows:
make install
Download and build the system and dump-capture kernels
------------------------------------------------------
Download the mainline (vanilla) kernel source code (2.6.13-rc1 or newer)
from http://www.kernel.org. Two kernels must be built: a system kernel
and a dump-capture kernel. Use the following steps to configure these
kernels with the necessary kexec and Kdump features:
System kernel
-------------
1) Enable "kexec system call" in "Processor type and features."
A) First kernel or regular kernel:
----------------------------------
a) Enable "kexec system call" feature (in Processor type and features).
CONFIG_KEXEC=y
b) Enable "sysfs file system support" (in Pseudo filesystems).
2) Enable "sysfs file system support" in "Filesystem" -> "Pseudo
filesystems." This is usually enabled by default.
CONFIG_SYSFS=y
c) make
d) Boot into first kernel with the command line parameter "crashkernel=Y@X".
Use appropriate values for X and Y. Y denotes how much memory to reserve
for the second kernel, and X denotes at what physical address the
reserved memory section starts. For example: "crashkernel=64M@16M".
Note that "sysfs file system support" might not appear in the "Pseudo
filesystems" menu if "Configure standard kernel features (for small
systems)" is not enabled in "General Setup." In this case, check the
.config file itself to ensure that sysfs is turned on, as follows:
grep 'CONFIG_SYSFS' .config
3) Enable "Compile the kernel with debug info" in "Kernel hacking."
CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=Y
This causes the kernel to be built with debug symbols. The dump
analysis tools require a vmlinux with debug symbols in order to read
and analyze a dump file.
4) Make and install the kernel and its modules. Update the boot loader
(such as grub, yaboot, or lilo) configuration files as necessary.
5) Boot the system kernel with the boot parameter "crashkernel=Y@X",
where Y specifies how much memory to reserve for the dump-capture kernel
and X specifies the beginning of this reserved memory. For example,
"crashkernel=64M@16M" tells the system kernel to reserve 64 MB of memory
starting at physical address 0x01000000 for the dump-capture kernel.
On x86 and x86_64, use "crashkernel=64M@16M".
On ppc64, use "crashkernel=128M@32M".
B) Second kernel or dump capture kernel:
---------------------------------------
a) For i386 architecture enable Highmem support
CONFIG_HIGHMEM=y
b) Enable "kernel crash dumps" feature (under "Processor type and features")
The dump-capture kernel
-----------------------
1) Under "General setup," append "-kdump" to the current string in
"Local version."
2) On x86, enable high memory support under "Processor type and
features":
CONFIG_HIGHMEM64G=y
or
CONFIG_HIGHMEM4G
3) On x86 and x86_64, disable symmetric multi-processing support
under "Processor type and features":
CONFIG_SMP=n
(If CONFIG_SMP=y, then specify maxcpus=1 on the kernel command line
when loading the dump-capture kernel, see section "Load the Dump-capture
Kernel".)
4) On ppc64, disable NUMA support and enable EMBEDDED support:
CONFIG_NUMA=n
CONFIG_EMBEDDED=y
CONFIG_EEH=N for the dump-capture kernel
5) Enable "kernel crash dumps" support under "Processor type and
features":
CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP=y
c) Make sure a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). By default this value
is 0x1000000 (16MB) and it should be same as X (See option d above),
e.g., 16 MB or 0x1000000.
CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000
d) Enable "/proc/vmcore support" (Optional, under "Pseudo filesystems").
6) Use a suitable value for "Physical address where the kernel is
loaded" (under "Processor type and features"). This only appears when
"kernel crash dumps" is enabled. By default this value is 0x1000000
(16MB). It should be the same as X in the "crashkernel=Y@X" boot
parameter discussed above.
On x86 and x86_64, use "CONFIG_PHYSICAL_START=0x1000000".
On ppc64 the value is automatically set at 32MB when
CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP is set.
6) Optionally enable "/proc/vmcore support" under "Filesystems" ->
"Pseudo filesystems".
CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE=y
(CONFIG_PROC_VMCORE is set by default when CONFIG_CRASH_DUMP is selected.)
3) After booting to regular kernel or first kernel, load the second kernel
using the following command:
7) Make and install the kernel and its modules. DO NOT add this kernel
to the boot loader configuration files.
kexec -p <second-kernel> --args-linux --elf32-core-headers
--append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll maxcpus=1"
Notes:
======
i) <second-kernel> has to be a vmlinux image ie uncompressed elf image.
bzImage will not work, as of now.
ii) --args-linux has to be speicfied as if kexec it loading an elf image,
it needs to know that the arguments supplied are of linux type.
iii) By default ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format to support systems
with more than 4GB memory. Option --elf32-core-headers forces generation
of ELF32 headers. The reason for this option being, as of now gdb can
not open vmcore file with ELF64 headers on a 32 bit systems. So ELF32
headers can be used if one has non-PAE systems and hence memory less
than 4GB.
iv) Specify "irqpoll" as command line parameter. This reduces driver
initialization failures in second kernel due to shared interrupts.
v) <root-dev> needs to be specified in a format corresponding to the root
Load the Dump-capture Kernel
============================
After booting to the system kernel, load the dump-capture kernel using
the following command:
kexec -p <dump-capture-kernel> \
--initrd=<initrd-for-dump-capture-kernel> --args-linux \
--append="root=<root-dev> init 1 irqpoll"
Notes on loading the dump-capture kernel:
* <dump-capture-kernel> must be a vmlinux image (that is, an
uncompressed ELF image). bzImage does not work at this time.
* By default, the ELF headers are stored in ELF64 format to support
systems with more than 4GB memory. The --elf32-core-headers option can
be used to force the generation of ELF32 headers. This is necessary
because GDB currently cannot open vmcore files with ELF64 headers on
32-bit systems. ELF32 headers can be used on non-PAE systems (that is,
less than 4GB of memory).
* The "irqpoll" boot parameter reduces driver initialization failures
due to shared interrupts in the dump-capture kernel.
* You must specify <root-dev> in the format corresponding to the root
device name in the output of mount command.
vi) If you have built the drivers required to mount root file system as
modules in <second-kernel>, then, specify
--initrd=<initrd-for-second-kernel>.
vii) Specify maxcpus=1 as, if during first kernel run, if panic happens on
non-boot cpus, second kernel doesn't seem to be boot up all the cpus.
The other option is to always built the second kernel without SMP
support ie CONFIG_SMP=n
4) After successfully loading the second kernel as above, if a panic occurs
system reboots into the second kernel. A module can be written to force
the panic or "ALT-SysRq-c" can be used initiate a crash dump for testing
purposes.
* "init 1" boots the dump-capture kernel into single-user mode without
networking. If you want networking, use "init 3."
5) Once the second kernel has booted, write out the dump file using
Kernel Panic
============
After successfully loading the dump-capture kernel as previously
described, the system will reboot into the dump-capture kernel if a
system crash is triggered. Trigger points are located in panic(),
die(), die_nmi() and in the sysrq handler (ALT-SysRq-c).
The following conditions will execute a crash trigger point:
If a hard lockup is detected and "NMI watchdog" is configured, the system
will boot into the dump-capture kernel ( die_nmi() ).
If die() is called, and it happens to be a thread with pid 0 or 1, or die()
is called inside interrupt context or die() is called and panic_on_oops is set,
the system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
On powererpc systems when a soft-reset is generated, die() is called by all cpus and the system system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
For testing purposes, you can trigger a crash by using "ALT-SysRq-c",
"echo c > /proc/sysrq-trigger or write a module to force the panic.
Write Out the Dump File
=======================
After the dump-capture kernel is booted, write out the dump file with
the following command:
cp /proc/vmcore <dump-file>
Dump memory can also be accessed as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear/raw
view. To create the device, type:
You can also access dumped memory as a /dev/oldmem device for a linear
and raw view. To create the device, use the following command:
mknod /dev/oldmem c 1 12
Use "dd" with suitable options for count, bs and skip to access specific
portions of the dump.
Use the dd command with suitable options for count, bs, and skip to
access specific portions of the dump.
Entire memory: dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
To see the entire memory, use the following command:
dd if=/dev/oldmem of=oldmem.001
ANALYSIS
Analysis
========
Limited analysis can be done using gdb on the dump file copied out of
/proc/vmcore. Use vmlinux built with -g and run
Before analyzing the dump image, you should reboot into a stable kernel.
You can do limited analysis using GDB on the dump file copied out of
/proc/vmcore. Use the debug vmlinux built with -g and run the following
command:
gdb vmlinux <dump-file>
Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, memory display
work fine.
Stack trace for the task on processor 0, register display, and memory
display work fine.
Note: gdb cannot analyse core files generated in ELF64 format for i386.
Note: GDB cannot analyze core files generated in ELF64 format for x86.
On systems with a maximum of 4GB of memory, you can generate
ELF32-format headers using the --elf32-core-headers kernel option on the
dump kernel.
Latest "crash" (crash-4.0-2.18) as available on Dave Anderson's site
http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/ works well with kdump format.
You can also use the Crash utility to analyze dump files in Kdump
format. Crash is available on Dave Anderson's site at the following URL:
http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/
TODO
====
1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism so that core file size is not
insane on systems having huge memory banks.
2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for crashdump
and same kernel as the first kernel can be used to capture the dump.
To Do
=====
1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism, so core file size is not
extreme on systems with huge memory banks.
2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for
crash_dump, and the same kernel as the system kernel can be used to
capture the dump.
CONTACT
Contact
=======
Vivek Goyal (vgoyal@in.ibm.com)
Maneesh Soni (maneesh@in.ibm.com)
Trademark
=========
Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.

12
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
View File

@ -147,6 +147,9 @@ running once the system is up.
acpi_irq_isa= [HW,ACPI] If irq_balance, mark listed IRQs used by ISA
Format: <irq>,<irq>...
acpi_os_name= [HW,ACPI] Tell ACPI BIOS the name of the OS
Format: To spoof as Windows 98: ="Microsoft Windows"
acpi_osi= [HW,ACPI] empty param disables _OSI
acpi_serialize [HW,ACPI] force serialization of AML methods
@ -1402,6 +1405,15 @@ running once the system is up.
If enabled at boot time, /selinux/disable can be used
later to disable prior to initial policy load.
selinux_compat_net =
[SELINUX] Set initial selinux_compat_net flag value.
Format: { "0" | "1" }
0 -- use new secmark-based packet controls
1 -- use legacy packet controls
Default value is 0 (preferred).
Value can be changed at runtime via
/selinux/compat_net.
serialnumber [BUGS=IA-32]
sg_def_reserved_size= [SCSI]

39
Documentation/keys.txt
View File

@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ This document has the following sections:
- Key overview
- Key service overview
- Key access permissions
- SELinux support
- New procfs files
- Userspace system call interface
- Kernel services
@ -232,6 +233,34 @@ For changing the ownership, group ID or permissions mask, being the owner of
the key or having the sysadmin capability is sufficient.
===============
SELINUX SUPPORT
===============
The security class "key" has been added to SELinux so that mandatory access
controls can be applied to keys created within various contexts. This support
is preliminary, and is likely to change quite significantly in the near future.
Currently, all of the basic permissions explained above are provided in SELinux
as well; SE Linux is simply invoked after all basic permission checks have been
performed.
Each key is labeled with the same context as the task to which it belongs.
Typically, this is the same task that was running when the key was created.
The default keyrings are handled differently, but in a way that is very
intuitive:
(*) The user and user session keyrings that are created when the user logs in
are currently labeled with the context of the login manager.
(*) The keyrings associated with new threads are each labeled with the context
of their associated thread, and both session and process keyrings are
handled similarly.
Note, however, that the default keyrings associated with the root user are
labeled with the default kernel context, since they are created early in the
boot process, before root has a chance to log in.
================
NEW PROCFS FILES
================
@ -935,6 +964,16 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
It is not safe to sleep in this method; the caller may hold spinlocks.
(*) void (*revoke)(struct key *key);
This method is optional. It is called to discard part of the payload
data upon a key being revoked. The caller will have the key semaphore
write-locked.
It is safe to sleep in this method, though care should be taken to avoid
a deadlock against the key semaphore.
(*) void (*destroy)(struct key *key);
This method is optional. It is called to discard the payload data on a key

368
Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
View File

@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Contents:
- Control dependencies.
- SMP barrier pairing.
- Examples of memory barrier sequences.
- Read memory barriers vs load speculation.
(*) Explicit kernel barriers.
@ -248,7 +249,7 @@ And there are a number of things that _must_ or _must_not_ be assumed:
we may get either of:
STORE *A = X; Y = LOAD *A;
STORE *A = Y;
STORE *A = Y = X;
=========================
@ -261,9 +262,14 @@ What is required is some way of intervening to instruct the compiler and the
CPU to restrict the order.
Memory barriers are such interventions. They impose a perceived partial
ordering between the memory operations specified on either side of the barrier.
They request that the sequence of memory events generated appears to other
parts of the system as if the barrier is effective on that CPU.
ordering over the memory operations on either side of the barrier.
Such enforcement is important because the CPUs and other devices in a system
can use a variety of tricks to improve performance - including reordering,
deferral and combination of memory operations; speculative loads; speculative
branch prediction and various types of caching. Memory barriers are used to
override or suppress these tricks, allowing the code to sanely control the
interaction of multiple CPUs and/or devices.
VARIETIES OF MEMORY BARRIER
@ -281,7 +287,7 @@ Memory barriers come in four basic varieties:
A write barrier is a partial ordering on stores only; it is not required
to have any effect on loads.
A CPU can be viewed as as commiting a sequence of store operations to the
A CPU can be viewed as committing a sequence of store operations to the
memory system as time progresses. All stores before a write barrier will
occur in the sequence _before_ all the stores after the write barrier.
@ -344,9 +350,12 @@ Memory barriers come in four basic varieties:
(4) General memory barriers.
A general memory barrier is a combination of both a read memory barrier
and a write memory barrier. It is a partial ordering over both loads and
stores.
A general memory barrier gives a guarantee that all the LOAD and STORE
operations specified before the barrier will appear to happen before all
the LOAD and STORE operations specified after the barrier with respect to
the other components of the system.
A general memory barrier is a partial ordering over both loads and stores.
General memory barriers imply both read and write memory barriers, and so
can substitute for either.
@ -409,7 +418,7 @@ There are certain things that the Linux kernel memory barriers do not guarantee:
indirect effect will be the order in which the second CPU sees the effects
of the first CPU's accesses occur, but see the next point:
(*) There is no guarantee that the a CPU will see the correct order of effects
(*) There is no guarantee that a CPU will see the correct order of effects
from a second CPU's accesses, even _if_ the second CPU uses a memory
barrier, unless the first CPU _also_ uses a matching memory barrier (see
the subsection on "SMP Barrier Pairing").
@ -457,8 +466,8 @@ Whilst this may seem like a failure of coherency or causality maintenance, it
isn't, and this behaviour can be observed on certain real CPUs (such as the DEC
Alpha).
To deal with this, a data dependency barrier must be inserted between the
address load and the data load:
To deal with this, a data dependency barrier or better must be inserted
between the address load and the data load:
CPU 1 CPU 2
=============== ===============
@ -480,7 +489,7 @@ lines. The pointer P might be stored in an odd-numbered cache line, and the
variable B might be stored in an even-numbered cache line. Then, if the
even-numbered bank of the reading CPU's cache is extremely busy while the
odd-numbered bank is idle, one can see the new value of the pointer P (&B),
but the old value of the variable B (1).
but the old value of the variable B (2).
Another example of where data dependency barriers might by required is where a
@ -546,9 +555,9 @@ write barrier, though, again, a general barrier is viable:
=============== ===============
a = 1;
<write barrier>
b = 2; x = a;
b = 2; x = b;
<read barrier>
y = b;
y = a;
Or:
@ -563,6 +572,18 @@ Or:
Basically, the read barrier always has to be there, even though it can be of
the "weaker" type.
[!] Note that the stores before the write barrier would normally be expected to
match the loads after the read barrier or data dependency barrier, and vice
versa:
CPU 1 CPU 2
=============== ===============
a = 1; }---- --->{ v = c
b = 2; } \ / { w = d
<write barrier> \ <read barrier>
c = 3; } / \ { x = a;
d = 4; }---- --->{ y = b;
EXAMPLES OF MEMORY BARRIER SEQUENCES
------------------------------------
@ -600,8 +621,8 @@ STORE B, STORE C } all occuring before the unordered set of { STORE D, STORE E
| | +------+
+-------+ : :
|
| Sequence in which stores committed to memory system
| by CPU 1
| Sequence in which stores are committed to the
| memory system by CPU 1
V
@ -683,14 +704,12 @@ then the following will occur:
| : : | |
| : : | CPU 2 |
| +-------+ | |
\ | X->9 |------>| |
\ +-------+ | |
----->| B->2 | | |
+-------+ | |
Makes sure all effects ---> ddddddddddddddddd | |
prior to the store of C +-------+ | |
are perceptible to | B->2 |------>| |
successive loads +-------+ | |
| | X->9 |------>| |
| +-------+ | |
Makes sure all effects ---> \ ddddddddddddddddd | |
prior to the store of C \ +-------+ | |
are perceptible to ----->| B->2 |------>| |
subsequent loads +-------+ | |
: : +-------+
@ -699,75 +718,241 @@ following sequence of events:
CPU 1 CPU 2
======================= =======================
{ A = 0, B = 9 }
STORE A=1
STORE B=2
STORE C=3
<write barrier>
STORE D=4
STORE E=5
LOAD A
STORE B=2
LOAD B
LOAD C
LOAD D
LOAD E
LOAD A
Without intervention, CPU 2 may then choose to perceive the events on CPU 1 in
some effectively random order, despite the write barrier issued by CPU 1:
+-------+ : :
| | +------+
| |------>| C=3 | }
| | : +------+ }
| | : | A=1 | }
| | : +------+ }
| CPU 1 | : | B=2 | }---
| | +------+ } \
| | wwwwwwwwwwwww} \
| | +------+ } \ : : +-------+
| | : | E=5 | } \ +-------+ | |
| | : +------+ } \ { | C->3 |------>| |
| |------>| D=4 | } \ { +-------+ : | |
| | +------+ \ { | E->5 | : | |
+-------+ : : \ { +-------+ : | |
Transfer -->{ | A->1 | : | CPU 2 |
from CPU 1 { +-------+ : | |
to CPU 2 { | D->4 | : | |
{ +-------+ : | |
{ | B->2 |------>| |
+-------+ | |
: : +-------+
+-------+ : : : :
| | +------+ +-------+
| |------>| A=1 |------ --->| A->0 |
| | +------+ \ +-------+
| CPU 1 | wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww \ --->| B->9 |
| | +------+ | +-------+
| |------>| B=2 |--- | : :
| | +------+ \ | : : +-------+
+-------+ : : \ | +-------+ | |
---------->| B->2 |------>| |
| +-------+ | CPU 2 |
| | A->0 |------>| |
| +-------+ | |
| : : +-------+
\ : :
\ +-------+
---->| A->1 |
+-------+
: :
If, however, a read barrier were to be placed between the load of C and the
load of D on CPU 2, then the partial ordering imposed by CPU 1 will be
perceived correctly by CPU 2.
If, however, a read barrier were to be placed between the load of B and the
load of A on CPU 2:
+-------+ : :
| | +------+
| |------>| C=3 | }
| | : +------+ }
| | : | A=1 | }---
| | : +------+ } \
| CPU 1 | : | B=2 | } \
| | +------+ \
| | wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww \
| | +------+ \ : : +-------+
| | : | E=5 | } \ +-------+ | |
| | : +------+ }--- \ { | C->3 |------>| |
| |------>| D=4 | } \ \ { +-------+ : | |
| | +------+ \ -->{ | B->2 | : | |
+-------+ : : \ { +-------+ : | |
\ { | A->1 | : | CPU 2 |
\ +-------+ | |
CPU 1 CPU 2
======================= =======================
{ A = 0, B = 9 }
STORE A=1
<write barrier>
STORE B=2
LOAD B
<read barrier>
LOAD A
then the partial ordering imposed by CPU 1 will be perceived correctly by CPU
2:
+-------+ : : : :
| | +------+ +-------+
| |------>| A=1 |------ --->| A->0 |
| | +------+ \ +-------+
| CPU 1 | wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww \ --->| B->9 |
| | +------+ | +-------+
| |------>| B=2 |--- | : :
| | +------+ \ | : : +-------+
+-------+ : : \ | +-------+ | |
---------->| B->2 |------>| |
| +-------+ | CPU 2 |
| : : | |
| : : | |
At this point the read ----> \ rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr | |
barrier causes all effects \ +-------+ | |
prior to the storage of C \ { | E->5 | : | |
to be perceptible to CPU 2 -->{ +-------+ : | |
{ | D->4 |------>| |
prior to the storage of B ---->| A->1 |------>| |
to be perceptible to CPU 2 +-------+ | |
: : +-------+
To illustrate this more completely, consider what could happen if the code
contained a load of A either side of the read barrier:
CPU 1 CPU 2
======================= =======================
{ A = 0, B = 9 }
STORE A=1
<write barrier>
STORE B=2
LOAD B
LOAD A [first load of A]
<read barrier>
LOAD A [second load of A]
Even though the two loads of A both occur after the load of B, they may both
come up with different values:
+-------+ : : : :
| | +------+ +-------+
| |------>| A=1 |------ --->| A->0 |
| | +------+ \ +-------+
| CPU 1 | wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww \ --->| B->9 |
| | +------+ | +-------+
| |------>| B=2 |--- | : :
| | +------+ \ | : : +-------+
+-------+ : : \ | +-------+ | |
---------->| B->2 |------>| |
| +-------+ | CPU 2 |
| : : | |
| : : | |
| +-------+ | |
| | A->0 |------>| 1st |
| +-------+ | |
At this point the read ----> \ rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr | |
barrier causes all effects \ +-------+ | |
prior to the storage of B ---->| A->1 |------>| 2nd |
to be perceptible to CPU 2 +-------+ | |
: : +-------+
But it may be that the update to A from CPU 1 becomes perceptible to CPU 2
before the read barrier completes anyway:
+-------+ : : : :
| | +------+ +-------+
| |------>| A=1 |------ --->| A->0 |
| | +------+ \ +-------+
| CPU 1 | wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww \ --->| B->9 |
| | +------+ | +-------+
| |------>| B=2 |--- | : :
| | +------+ \ | : : +-------+
+-------+ : : \ | +-------+ | |
---------->| B->2 |------>| |
| +-------+ | CPU 2 |
| : : | |
\ : : | |
\ +-------+ | |
---->| A->1 |------>| 1st |
+-------+ | |
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr | |
+-------+ | |
| A->1 |------>| 2nd |
+-------+ | |
: : +-------+
The guarantee is that the second load will always come up with A == 1 if the
load of B came up with B == 2. No such guarantee exists for the first load of
A; that may come up with either A == 0 or A == 1.
READ MEMORY BARRIERS VS LOAD SPECULATION
----------------------------------------
Many CPUs speculate with loads: that is they see that they will need to load an
item from memory, and they find a time where they're not using the bus for any
other loads, and so do the load in advance - even though they haven't actually
got to that point in the instruction execution flow yet. This permits the
actual load instruction to potentially complete immediately because the CPU
already has the value to hand.
It may turn out that the CPU didn't actually need the value - perhaps because a
branch circumvented the load - in which case it can discard the value or just
cache it for later use.
Consider:
CPU 1 CPU 2
======================= =======================
LOAD B
DIVIDE } Divide instructions generally
DIVIDE } take a long time to perform
LOAD A
Which might appear as this:
: : +-------+
+-------+ | |
--->| B->2 |------>| |
+-------+ | CPU 2 |
: :DIVIDE | |
+-------+ | |
The CPU being busy doing a ---> --->| A->0 |~~~~ | |
division speculates on the +-------+ ~ | |
LOAD of A : : ~ | |
: :DIVIDE | |
: : ~ | |
Once the divisions are complete --> : : ~-->| |
the CPU can then perform the : : | |
LOAD with immediate effect : : +-------+
Placing a read barrier or a data dependency barrier just before the second
load:
CPU 1 CPU 2
======================= =======================
LOAD B
DIVIDE
DIVIDE
<read barrier>
LOAD A
will force any value speculatively obtained to be reconsidered to an extent
dependent on the type of barrier used. If there was no change made to the
speculated memory location, then the speculated value will just be used:
: : +-------+
+-------+ | |
--->| B->2 |------>| |
+-------+ | CPU 2 |
: :DIVIDE | |
+-------+ | |
The CPU being busy doing a ---> --->| A->0 |~~~~ | |
division speculates on the +-------+ ~ | |
LOAD of A : : ~ | |
: :DIVIDE | |
: : ~ | |
: : ~ | |
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr~ | |
: : ~ | |
: : ~-->| |
: : | |
: : +-------+
but if there was an update or an invalidation from another CPU pending, then
the speculation will be cancelled and the value reloaded:
: : +-------+
+-------+ | |
--->| B->2 |------>| |
+-------+ | CPU 2 |
: :DIVIDE | |
+-------+ | |
The CPU being busy doing a ---> --->| A->0 |~~~~ | |
division speculates on the +-------+ ~ | |
LOAD of A : : ~ | |
: :DIVIDE | |
: : ~ | |
: : ~ | |
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr | |
+-------+ | |
The speculation is discarded ---> --->| A->1 |------>| |
and an updated value is +-------+ | |
retrieved : : +-------+
========================
EXPLICIT KERNEL BARRIERS
========================
@ -901,7 +1086,7 @@ IMPLICIT KERNEL MEMORY BARRIERS
===============================
Some of the other functions in the linux kernel imply memory barriers, amongst
which are locking, scheduling and memory allocation functions.
which are locking and scheduling functions.
This specification is a _minimum_ guarantee; any particular architecture may
provide more substantial guarantees, but these may not be relied upon outside
@ -966,6 +1151,20 @@ equivalent to a full barrier, but a LOCK followed by an UNLOCK is not.
barriers is that the effects instructions outside of a critical section may
seep into the inside of the critical section.
A LOCK followed by an UNLOCK may not be assumed to be full memory barrier
because it is possible for an access preceding the LOCK to happen after the
LOCK, and an access following the UNLOCK to happen before the UNLOCK, and the
two accesses can themselves then cross:
*A = a;
LOCK
UNLOCK
*B = b;
may occur as:
LOCK, STORE *B, STORE *A, UNLOCK
Locks and semaphores may not provide any guarantee of ordering on UP compiled
systems, and so cannot be counted on in such a situation to actually achieve
anything at all - especially with respect to I/O accesses - unless combined
@ -1016,8 +1215,6 @@ Other functions that imply barriers:
(*) schedule() and similar imply full memory barriers.
(*) Memory allocation and release functions imply full memory barriers.
=================================
INTER-CPU LOCKING BARRIER EFFECTS
@ -1269,9 +1466,8 @@ instruction itself is complete.
On a UP system - where this wouldn't be a problem - the smp_mb() is just a
compiler barrier, thus making sure the compiler emits the instructions in the
right order without actually intervening in the CPU. Since there there's only
one CPU, that CPU's dependency ordering logic will take care of everything
else.
right order without actually intervening in the CPU. Since there's only one
CPU, that CPU's dependency ordering logic will take care of everything else.
ATOMIC OPERATIONS
@ -1448,9 +1644,9 @@ functions:
The PCI bus, amongst others, defines an I/O space concept - which on such
CPUs as i386 and x86_64 cpus readily maps to the CPU's concept of I/O
space. However, it may also mapped as a virtual I/O space in the CPU's
memory map, particularly on those CPUs that don't support alternate
I/O spaces.
space. However, it may also be mapped as a virtual I/O space in the CPU's
memory map, particularly on those CPUs that don't support alternate I/O
spaces.
Accesses to this space may be fully synchronous (as on i386), but
intermediary bridges (such as the PCI host bridge) may not fully honour

10
Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200
View File

@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ Copyright (C) 2004-2006, Intel Corporation
README.ipw2200
Version: 1.0.8
Date : October 20, 2005
Version: 1.1.2
Date : March 30, 2006
Index
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ file.
1.1. Overview of Features
-----------------------------------------------
The current release (1.0.8) supports the following features:
The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features:
+ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed)
+ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc)
@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ and can set the contents via echo. For example:
% cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem
(only available if CONFIG_IPW_DEBUG was configured when the driver was
built).
(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver
was built).
You can set the debug level via:

323
Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO
Latest update: 21 June 2005
Latest update: 24 April 2006
Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov>
Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 :
@ -12,6 +12,8 @@ Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 :
- Jay Vosburgh <fubar at us dot ibm dot com>
Reorganized and updated Feb 2005 by Jay Vosburgh
Added Sysfs information: 2006/04/24
- Mitch Williams <mitch.a.williams at intel.com>
Introduction
============
@ -38,61 +40,62 @@ Table of Contents
2. Bonding Driver Options
3. Configuring Bonding Devices
3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support
3.1.1 Using DHCP with sysconfig
3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with sysconfig
3.2 Configuration with initscripts support
3.2.1 Using DHCP with initscripts
3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with initscripts
3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually
3.1 Configuration with Sysconfig Support
3.1.1 Using DHCP with Sysconfig
3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
3.2 Configuration with Initscripts Support
3.2.1 Using DHCP with Initscripts
3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
3.3.1 Configuring Multiple Bonds Manually
3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
5. Querying Bonding Configuration
5.1 Bonding Configuration
5.2 Network Configuration
4. Querying Bonding Configuration
4.1 Bonding Configuration
4.2 Network Configuration
6. Switch Configuration
5. Switch Configuration
7. 802.1q VLAN Support
6. 802.1q VLAN Support
8. Link Monitoring
8.1 ARP Monitor Operation
8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
8.3 MII Monitor Operation
7. Link Monitoring
7.1 ARP Monitor Operation
7.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
7.3 MII Monitor Operation
9. Potential Trouble Sources
9.1 Adventures in Routing
9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
9.3 Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
8. Potential Trouble Sources
8.1 Adventures in Routing
8.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
8.3 Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
10. SNMP agents
9. SNMP agents
11. Promiscuous mode
10. Promiscuous mode
12. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.2 HA Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
11.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
11.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
11.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
11.2.2 HA Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
13. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
13.1 Maximum Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
13.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
13.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
13.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
13.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
13.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
12.1 Maximum Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
12.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
12.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
12.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
14. Switch Behavior Issues
14.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
14.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
13. Switch Behavior Issues
13.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
13.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
15. Hardware Specific Considerations
15.1 IBM BladeCenter
14. Hardware Specific Considerations
14.1 IBM BladeCenter
16. Frequently Asked Questions
15. Frequently Asked Questions
17. Resources and Links
16. Resources and Links
1. Bonding Driver Installation
@ -156,6 +159,9 @@ you're trying to build it for. Some distros (e.g., Red Hat from 7.1
onwards) do not have /usr/include/linux symbolically linked to the
default kernel source include directory.
SECOND IMPORTANT NOTE:
If you plan to configure bonding using sysfs, you do not need
to use ifenslave.
2. Bonding Driver Options
=========================
@ -270,7 +276,7 @@ mode
In bonding version 2.6.2 or later, when a failover
occurs in active-backup mode, bonding will issue one
or more gratuitous ARPs on the newly active slave.
One gratutious ARP is issued for the bonding master
One gratuitous ARP is issued for the bonding master
interface and each VLAN interfaces configured above
it, provided that the interface has at least one IP
address configured. Gratuitous ARPs issued for VLAN
@ -377,7 +383,7 @@ mode
When a link is reconnected or a new slave joins the
bond the receive traffic is redistributed among all
active slaves in the bond by initiating ARP Replies
with the selected mac address to each of the
with the selected MAC address to each of the
clients. The updelay parameter (detailed below) must
be set to a value equal or greater than the switch's
forwarding delay so that the ARP Replies sent to the
@ -498,11 +504,12 @@ not exist, and the layer2 policy is the only policy.
3. Configuring Bonding Devices
==============================
There are, essentially, two methods for configuring bonding:
with support from the distro's network initialization scripts, and
without. Distros generally use one of two packages for the network
initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig. Recent versions of
these packages have support for bonding, while older versions do not.
You can configure bonding using either your distro's network
initialization scripts, or manually using either ifenslave or the
sysfs interface. Distros generally use one of two packages for the
network initialization scripts: initscripts or sysconfig. Recent
versions of these packages have support for bonding, while older
versions do not.
We will first describe the options for configuring bonding for
distros using versions of initscripts and sysconfig with full or
@ -530,7 +537,7 @@ $ grep ifenslave /sbin/ifup
If this returns any matches, then your initscripts or
sysconfig has support for bonding.
3.1 Configuration with sysconfig support
3.1 Configuration with Sysconfig Support
----------------------------------------
This section applies to distros using a version of sysconfig
@ -538,7 +545,7 @@ with bonding support, for example, SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 9.
SuSE SLES 9's networking configuration system does support
bonding, however, at this writing, the YaST system configuration
frontend does not provide any means to work with bonding devices.
front end does not provide any means to work with bonding devices.
Bonding devices can be managed by hand, however, as follows.
First, if they have not already been configured, configure the
@ -660,7 +667,7 @@ format can be found in an example ifcfg template file:
Note that the template does not document the various BONDING_
settings described above, but does describe many of the other options.
3.1.1 Using DHCP with sysconfig
3.1.1 Using DHCP with Sysconfig
-------------------------------
Under sysconfig, configuring a device with BOOTPROTO='dhcp'
@ -670,7 +677,7 @@ attempt to obtain the device address from DHCP prior to adding any of
the slave devices. Without active slaves, the DHCP requests are not
sent to the network.
3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with sysconfig
3.1.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Sysconfig
-----------------------------------------------
The sysconfig network initialization system is capable of
@ -685,7 +692,7 @@ ifcfg-bondX files.
options in the ifcfg-bondX file, it is not necessary to add them to
the system /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf configuration file.
3.2 Configuration with initscripts support
3.2 Configuration with Initscripts Support
------------------------------------------
This section applies to distros using a version of initscripts
@ -756,7 +763,7 @@ options for your configuration.
will restart the networking subsystem and your bond link should be now
up and running.
3.2.1 Using DHCP with initscripts
3.2.1 Using DHCP with Initscripts
---------------------------------
Recent versions of initscripts (the version supplied with
@ -768,7 +775,7 @@ above, except replace the line "BOOTPROTO=none" with "BOOTPROTO=dhcp"
and add a line consisting of "TYPE=Bonding". Note that the TYPE value
is case sensitive.
3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with initscripts
3.2.2 Configuring Multiple Bonds with Initscripts
-------------------------------------------------
At this writing, the initscripts package does not directly
@ -784,8 +791,8 @@ Fedora Core kernels, and has been seen on RHEL 4 as well. On kernels
exhibiting this problem, it will be impossible to configure multiple
bonds with differing parameters.
3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually
--------------------------------
3.3 Configuring Bonding Manually with Ifenslave
-----------------------------------------------
This section applies to distros whose network initialization
scripts (the sysconfig or initscripts package) do not have specific
@ -889,11 +896,139 @@ install bond1 /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding -o bond1 \
This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and
unique name in place of bond1 for each subsequent instance.
3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
------------------------------------------
5. Querying Bonding Configuration
Starting with version 3.0, Channel Bonding may be configured
via the sysfs interface. This interface allows dynamic configuration
of all bonds in the system without unloading the module. It also
allows for adding and removing bonds at runtime. Ifenslave is no
longer required, though it is still supported.
Use of the sysfs interface allows you to use multiple bonds
with different configurations without having to reload the module.
It also allows you to use multiple, differently configured bonds when
bonding is compiled into the kernel.
You must have the sysfs filesystem mounted to configure
bonding this way. The examples in this document assume that you
are using the standard mount point for sysfs, e.g. /sys. If your
sysfs filesystem is mounted elsewhere, you will need to adjust the
example paths accordingly.
Creating and Destroying Bonds
-----------------------------
To add a new bond foo:
# echo +foo > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
To remove an existing bond bar:
# echo -bar > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
To show all existing bonds:
# cat /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
NOTE: due to 4K size limitation of sysfs files, this list may be
truncated if you have more than a few hundred bonds. This is unlikely
to occur under normal operating conditions.
Adding and Removing Slaves
--------------------------
Interfaces may be enslaved to a bond using the file
/sys/class/net/<bond>/bonding/slaves. The semantics for this file
are the same as for the bonding_masters file.
To enslave interface eth0 to bond bond0:
# ifconfig bond0 up
# echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
To free slave eth0 from bond bond0:
# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
NOTE: The bond must be up before slaves can be added. All
slaves are freed when the interface is brought down.
When an interface is enslaved to a bond, symlinks between the
two are created in the sysfs filesystem. In this case, you would get
/sys/class/net/bond0/slave_eth0 pointing to /sys/class/net/eth0, and
/sys/class/net/eth0/master pointing to /sys/class/net/bond0.
This means that you can tell quickly whether or not an
interface is enslaved by looking for the master symlink. Thus:
# echo -eth0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/master/bonding/slaves
will free eth0 from whatever bond it is enslaved to, regardless of
the name of the bond interface.
Changing a Bond's Configuration
-------------------------------
Each bond may be configured individually by manipulating the
files located in /sys/class/net/<bond name>/bonding
The names of these files correspond directly with the command-
line parameters described elsewhere in in this file, and, with the
exception of arp_ip_target, they accept the same values. To see the
current setting, simply cat the appropriate file.
A few examples will be given here; for specific usage
guidelines for each parameter, see the appropriate section in this
document.
To configure bond0 for balance-alb mode:
# ifconfig bond0 down
# echo 6 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
- or -
# echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
NOTE: The bond interface must be down before the mode can be
changed.
To enable MII monitoring on bond0 with a 1 second interval:
# echo 1000 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
NOTE: If ARP monitoring is enabled, it will disabled when MII
monitoring is enabled, and vice-versa.
To add ARP targets:
# echo +192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
# echo +192.168.0.101 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
NOTE: up to 10 target addresses may be specified.
To remove an ARP target:
# echo -192.168.0.100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/arp_ip_target
Example Configuration
---------------------
We begin with the same example that is shown in section 3.3,
executed with sysfs, and without using ifenslave.
To make a simple bond of two e100 devices (presumed to be eth0
and eth1), and have it persist across reboots, edit the appropriate
file (/etc/init.d/boot.local or /etc/rc.d/rc.local), and add the
following:
modprobe bonding
modprobe e100
echo balance-alb > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/mode
ifconfig bond0 192.168.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
echo 100 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/miimon
echo +eth0 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
echo +eth1 > /sys/class/net/bond0/bonding/slaves
To add a second bond, with two e1000 interfaces in
active-backup mode, using ARP monitoring, add the following lines to
your init script:
modprobe e1000
echo +bond1 > /sys/class/net/bonding_masters
echo active-backup > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/mode
ifconfig bond1 192.168.2.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 up
echo +192.168.2.100 /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_ip_target
echo 2000 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/arp_interval
echo +eth2 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
echo +eth3 > /sys/class/net/bond1/bonding/slaves
4. Querying Bonding Configuration
=================================
5.1 Bonding Configuration
4.1 Bonding Configuration
-------------------------
Each bonding device has a read-only file residing in the
@ -923,7 +1058,7 @@ generally as follows:
The precise format and contents will change depending upon the
bonding configuration, state, and version of the bonding driver.
5.2 Network configuration
4.2 Network configuration
-------------------------
The network configuration can be inspected using the ifconfig
@ -958,7 +1093,7 @@ eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:C0:F0:1F:37:B4
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
Interrupt:9 Base address:0x1400
6. Switch Configuration
5. Switch Configuration
=======================
For this section, "switch" refers to whatever system the
@ -991,7 +1126,7 @@ transmit policy for an EtherChannel group; all three will interoperate
with another EtherChannel group.
7. 802.1q VLAN Support
6. 802.1q VLAN Support
======================
It is possible to configure VLAN devices over a bond interface
@ -1042,7 +1177,7 @@ underlying device -- i.e. the bonding interface -- to promiscuous
mode, which might not be what you want.
8. Link Monitoring
7. Link Monitoring
==================
The bonding driver at present supports two schemes for
@ -1053,7 +1188,7 @@ monitor.
bonding driver itself, it is not possible to enable both ARP and MII
monitoring simultaneously.
8.1 ARP Monitor Operation
7.1 ARP Monitor Operation
-------------------------
The ARP monitor operates as its name suggests: it sends ARP
@ -1071,7 +1206,7 @@ those slaves will stay down. If networking monitoring (tcpdump, etc)
shows the ARP requests and replies on the network, then it may be that
your device driver is not updating last_rx and trans_start.
8.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
7.2 Configuring Multiple ARP Targets
------------------------------------
While ARP monitoring can be done with just one target, it can
@ -1094,7 +1229,7 @@ alias bond0 bonding
options bond0 arp_interval=60 arp_ip_target=192.168.0.100
8.3 MII Monitor Operation
7.3 MII Monitor Operation
-------------------------
The MII monitor monitors only the carrier state of the local
@ -1120,14 +1255,14 @@ does not support or had some error in processing both the MII register
and ethtool requests), then the MII monitor will assume the link is
up.
9. Potential Sources of Trouble
8. Potential Sources of Trouble
===============================
9.1 Adventures in Routing
8.1 Adventures in Routing
-------------------------
When bonding is configured, it is important that the slave
devices not have routes that supercede routes of the master (or,
devices not have routes that supersede routes of the master (or,
generally, not have routes at all). For example, suppose the bonding
device bond0 has two slaves, eth0 and eth1, and the routing table is
as follows:
@ -1154,11 +1289,11 @@ by the state of the routing table.
The solution here is simply to insure that slaves do not have
routes of their own, and if for some reason they must, those routes do
not supercede routes of their master. This should generally be the
not supersede routes of their master. This should generally be the
case, but unusual configurations or errant manual or automatic static
route additions may cause trouble.
9.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
8.2 Ethernet Device Renaming
----------------------------
On systems with network configuration scripts that do not
@ -1207,7 +1342,7 @@ modprobe with --ignore-install to cause the normal action to then take
place. Full documentation on this can be found in the modprobe.conf
and modprobe manual pages.
9.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
8.3. Painfully Slow Or No Failed Link Detection By Miimon
---------------------------------------------------------
By default, bonding enables the use_carrier option, which
@ -1235,7 +1370,7 @@ carrier state. It has no way to determine the state of devices on or
beyond other ports of a switch, or if a switch is refusing to pass
traffic while still maintaining carrier on.
10. SNMP agents
9. SNMP agents
===============
If running SNMP agents, the bonding driver should be loaded
@ -1281,7 +1416,7 @@ ifDescr, the association between the IP address and IfIndex remains
and SNMP functions such as Interface_Scan_Next will report that
association.
11. Promiscuous mode
10. Promiscuous mode
====================
When running network monitoring tools, e.g., tcpdump, it is
@ -1308,7 +1443,7 @@ sending to peers that are unassigned or if the load is unbalanced.
the active slave changes (e.g., due to a link failure), the
promiscuous setting will be propagated to the new active slave.
12. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
11. Configuring Bonding for High Availability
=============================================
High Availability refers to configurations that provide
@ -1318,7 +1453,7 @@ goal is to provide the maximum availability of network connectivity
(i.e., the network always works), even though other configurations
could provide higher throughput.
12.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
11.1 High Availability in a Single Switch Topology
--------------------------------------------------
If two hosts (or a host and a single switch) are directly
@ -1332,7 +1467,7 @@ the load will be rebalanced across the remaining devices.
See Section 13, "Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput"
for information on configuring bonding with one peer device.
12.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
11.2 High Availability in a Multiple Switch Topology
----------------------------------------------------
With multiple switches, the configuration of bonding and the
@ -1359,7 +1494,7 @@ switches (ISL, or inter switch link), and multiple ports connecting to
the outside world ("port3" on each switch). There is no technical
reason that this could not be extended to a third switch.
12.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
11.2.1 HA Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
-------------------------------------------------------------
In a topology such as the example above, the active-backup and
@ -1381,7 +1516,7 @@ broadcast: This mode is really a special purpose mode, and is suitable
necessary for some specific one-way traffic to reach both
independent networks, then the broadcast mode may be suitable.
12.2.2 HA Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
11.2.2 HA Link Monitoring Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
----------------------------------------------------------------
The choice of link monitoring ultimately depends upon your
@ -1402,10 +1537,10 @@ regardless of which switch is active, the ARP monitor has a suitable
target to query.
13. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
12. Configuring Bonding for Maximum Throughput
==============================================
13.1 Maximizing Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
12.1 Maximizing Throughput in a Single Switch Topology
------------------------------------------------------
In a single switch configuration, the best method to maximize
@ -1476,7 +1611,7 @@ destination to make load balancing decisions. The behavior of each
mode is described below.
13.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
12.1.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Single Switch Topology
-----------------------------------------------------------
This configuration is the easiest to set up and to understand,
@ -1607,7 +1742,7 @@ balance-alb: This mode is everything that balance-tlb is, and more.
device driver must support changing the hardware address while
the device is open.
13.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
12.1.2 MT Link Monitoring for Single Switch Topology
----------------------------------------------------
The choice of link monitoring may largely depend upon which
@ -1616,7 +1751,7 @@ support the use of the ARP monitor, and are thus restricted to using
the MII monitor (which does not provide as high a level of end to end
assurance as the ARP monitor).
13.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
12.2 Maximum Throughput in a Multiple Switch Topology
-----------------------------------------------------
Multiple switches may be utilized to optimize for throughput
@ -1651,7 +1786,7 @@ a single 72 port switch.
can be equipped with an additional network device connected to an
external network; this host then additionally acts as a gateway.
13.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.1 MT Bonding Mode Selection for Multiple Switch Topology
-------------------------------------------------------------
In actual practice, the bonding mode typically employed in
@ -1664,7 +1799,7 @@ packets has arrived). When employed in this fashion, the balance-rr
mode allows individual connections between two hosts to effectively
utilize greater than one interface's bandwidth.
13.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
12.2.2 MT Link Monitoring for Multiple Switch Topology
------------------------------------------------------
Again, in actual practice, the MII monitor is most often used
@ -1674,10 +1809,10 @@ advantages over the MII monitor are mitigated by the volume of probes
needed as the number of systems involved grows (remember that each
host in the network is configured with bonding).
14. Switch Behavior Issues
13. Switch Behavior Issues
==========================
14.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
13.1 Link Establishment and Failover Delays
-------------------------------------------
Some switches exhibit undesirable behavior with regard to the
@ -1712,7 +1847,7 @@ switches take a long time to go into backup mode, it may be desirable
to not activate a backup interface immediately after a link goes down.
Failover may be delayed via the downdelay bonding module option.
14.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
13.2 Duplicated Incoming Packets
--------------------------------
It is not uncommon to observe a short burst of duplicated
@ -1751,14 +1886,14 @@ behavior, it can be induced by clearing the MAC forwarding table (on
most Cisco switches, the privileged command "clear mac address-table
dynamic" will accomplish this).
15. Hardware Specific Considerations
14. Hardware Specific Considerations
====================================
This section contains additional information for configuring
bonding on specific hardware platforms, or for interfacing bonding
with particular switches or other devices.
15.1 IBM BladeCenter
14.1 IBM BladeCenter
--------------------
This applies to the JS20 and similar systems.
@ -1861,7 +1996,7 @@ bonding driver.
avoid fail-over delay issues when using bonding.
16. Frequently Asked Questions
15. Frequently Asked Questions
==============================
1. Is it SMP safe?
@ -1925,7 +2060,7 @@ not have special switch requirements, but do need device drivers that
support specific features (described in the appropriate section under
module parameters, above).
In 802.3ad mode, it works with with systems that support IEEE
In 802.3ad mode, it works with systems that support IEEE
802.3ad Dynamic Link Aggregation. Most managed and many unmanaged
switches currently available support 802.3ad.

7
Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
View File

@ -362,6 +362,13 @@ tcp_workaround_signed_windows - BOOLEAN
not receive a window scaling option from them.
Default: 0
tcp_slow_start_after_idle - BOOLEAN
If set, provide RFC2861 behavior and time out the congestion
window after an idle period. An idle period is defined at
the current RTO. If unset, the congestion window will not
be timed out after an idle period.
Default: 1
IP Variables:
ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS

8
Documentation/networking/netdevices.txt
View File

@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ dev->get_stats:
Context: nominally process, but don't sleep inside an rwlock
dev->hard_start_xmit:
Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
When the driver sets NETIF_F_LLTX in dev->features this will be
called without holding xmit_lock. In this case the driver
called without holding netif_tx_lock. In this case the driver
has to lock by itself when needed. It is recommended to use a try lock
for this and return -1 when the spin lock fails.
The locking there should also properly protect against
@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ dev->hard_start_xmit:
Only valid when NETIF_F_LLTX is set.
dev->tx_timeout:
Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
Context: BHs disabled
Notes: netif_queue_stopped() is guaranteed true
dev->set_multicast_list:
Synchronization: dev->xmit_lock spinlock.
Synchronization: netif_tx_lock spinlock.
Context: BHs disabled
dev->poll:

11
Documentation/networking/tuntap.txt
View File

@ -39,10 +39,13 @@ Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Maxim Krasnyansky <max_mk@yahoo.com>
mknod /dev/net/tun c 10 200
Set permissions:
e.g. chmod 0700 /dev/net/tun
if you want the device only accessible by root. Giving regular users the
right to assign network devices is NOT a good idea. Users could assign
bogus network interfaces to trick firewalls or administrators.
e.g. chmod 0666 /dev/net/tun
There's no harm in allowing the device to be accessible by non-root users,
since CAP_NET_ADMIN is required for creating network devices or for
connecting to network devices which aren't owned by the user in question.
If you want to create persistent devices and give ownership of them to
unprivileged users, then you need the /dev/net/tun device to be usable by
those users.
Driver module autoloading

14
Documentation/pci.txt
View File

@ -213,9 +213,17 @@ have been remapped by the kernel.
See Documentation/IO-mapping.txt for how to access device memory.
You still need to call request_region() for I/O regions and
request_mem_region() for memory regions to make sure nobody else is using the
same device.
The device driver needs to call pci_request_region() to make sure
no other device is already using the same resource. The driver is expected
to determine MMIO and IO Port resource availability _before_ calling
pci_enable_device(). Conversely, drivers should call pci_release_region()
_after_ calling pci_disable_device(). The idea is to prevent two devices
colliding on the same address range.
Generic flavors of pci_request_region() are request_mem_region()
(for MMIO ranges) and request_region() (for IO Port ranges).
Use these for address resources that are not described by "normal" PCI
interfaces (e.g. BAR).
All interrupt handlers should be registered with SA_SHIRQ and use the devid
to map IRQs to devices (remember that all PCI interrupts are shared).

90
Documentation/power/devices.txt
View File

@ -118,96 +118,6 @@ will fail.
There is currently no way to know what states a device or driver
supports a priori. This will change in the future.
pm_message_t meaning
pm_message_t has two fields. event ("major"), and flags. If driver
does not know event code, it aborts the request, returning error. Some
drivers may need to deal with special cases based on the actual type
of suspend operation being done at the system level. This is why
there are flags.
Event codes are:
ON -- no need to do anything except special cases like broken
HW.
# NOTIFICATION -- pretty much same as ON?
FREEZE -- stop DMA and interrupts, and be prepared to reinit HW from
scratch. That probably means stop accepting upstream requests, the
actual policy of what to do with them beeing specific to a given
driver. It's acceptable for a network driver to just drop packets
while a block driver is expected to block the queue so no request is
lost. (Use IDE as an example on how to do that). FREEZE requires no
power state change, and it's expected for drivers to be able to
quickly transition back to operating state.
SUSPEND -- like FREEZE, but also put hardware into low-power state. If
there's need to distinguish several levels of sleep, additional flag
is probably best way to do that.
Transitions are only from a resumed state to a suspended state, never
between 2 suspended states. (ON -> FREEZE or ON -> SUSPEND can happen,
FREEZE -> SUSPEND or SUSPEND -> FREEZE can not).
All events are:
[NOTE NOTE NOTE: If you are driver author, you should not care; you
should only look at event, and ignore flags.]
#Prepare for suspend -- userland is still running but we are going to
#enter suspend state. This gives drivers chance to load firmware from
#disk and store it in memory, or do other activities taht require
#operating userland, ability to kmalloc GFP_KERNEL, etc... All of these
#are forbiden once the suspend dance is started.. event = ON, flags =
#PREPARE_TO_SUSPEND
Apm standby -- prepare for APM event. Quiesce devices to make life
easier for APM BIOS. event = FREEZE, flags = APM_STANDBY
Apm suspend -- same as APM_STANDBY, but it we should probably avoid
spinning down disks. event = FREEZE, flags = APM_SUSPEND
System halt, reboot -- quiesce devices to make life easier for BIOS. event
= FREEZE, flags = SYSTEM_HALT or SYSTEM_REBOOT
System shutdown -- at least disks need to be spun down, or data may be
lost. Quiesce devices, just to make life easier for BIOS. event =
FREEZE, flags = SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN
Kexec -- turn off DMAs and put hardware into some state where new
kernel can take over. event = FREEZE, flags = KEXEC
Powerdown at end of swsusp -- very similar to SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, except wake
may need to be enabled on some devices. This actually has at least 3
subtypes, system can reboot, enter S4 and enter S5 at the end of
swsusp. event = FREEZE, flags = SWSUSP and one of SYSTEM_REBOOT,
SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, SYSTEM_S4
Suspend to ram -- put devices into low power state. event = SUSPEND,
flags = SUSPEND_TO_RAM
Freeze for swsusp snapshot -- stop DMA and interrupts. No need to put
devices into low power mode, but you must be able to reinitialize
device from scratch in resume method. This has two flavors, its done
once on suspending kernel, once on resuming kernel. event = FREEZE,
flags = DURING_SUSPEND or DURING_RESUME
Device detach requested from /sys -- deinitialize device; proably same as
SYSTEM_SHUTDOWN, I do not understand this one too much. probably event
= FREEZE, flags = DEV_DETACH.
#These are not really events sent:
#
#System fully on -- device is working normally; this is probably never
#passed to suspend() method... event = ON, flags = 0
#
#Ready after resume -- userland is now running, again. Time to free any
#memory you ate during prepare to suspend... event = ON, flags =
#READY_AFTER_RESUME
#
pm_message_t meaning
pm_message_t has two fields. event ("major"), and flags. If driver

78
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
View File

@ -18,10 +18,11 @@ Some warnings, first.
*
* (*) suspend/resume support is needed to make it safe.
*
* If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before suspend,
* If you have any filesystems on USB devices mounted before software suspend,
* they won't be accessible after resume and you may lose data, as though
* you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them
* (see the FAQ below for details).
* you have unplugged the USB devices with mounted filesystems on them;
* see the FAQ below for details. (This is not true for more traditional
* power states like "standby", which normally don't turn USB off.)
You need to append resume=/dev/your_swap_partition to kernel command
line. Then you suspend by
@ -204,7 +205,7 @@ Q: There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral
distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE.
A: Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct,
but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want USB to stay simple,
but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple,
slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later.
For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for
@ -349,25 +350,72 @@ Q: How do I make suspend more verbose?
A: If you want to see any non-error kernel messages on the virtual
terminal the kernel switches to during suspend, you have to set the
kernel console loglevel to at least 5, for example by doing
kernel console loglevel to at least 4 (KERN_WARNING), for example by
doing
# save the old loglevel
read LOGLEVEL DUMMY < /proc/sys/kernel/printk
# set the loglevel so we see the progress bar.
# if the level is higher than needed, we leave it alone.
if [ $LOGLEVEL -lt 5 ]; then
echo 5 > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
fi
IMG_SZ=0
read IMG_SZ < /sys/power/image_size
echo -n disk > /sys/power/state
RET=$?
#
# the logic here is:
# if image_size > 0 (without kernel support, IMG_SZ will be zero),
# then try again with image_size set to zero.
if [ $RET -ne 0 -a $IMG_SZ -ne 0 ]; then # try again with minimal image size
echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size
echo -n disk > /sys/power/state
RET=$?
fi
# restore previous loglevel
echo $LOGLEVEL > /proc/sys/kernel/printk
exit $RET
Q: Is this true that if I have a mounted filesystem on a USB device and
I suspend to disk, I can lose data unless the filesystem has been mounted
with "sync"?
A: That's right. It depends on your hardware, and it could be true even for
suspend-to-RAM. In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your
programs have information in buffers they haven't written out to disk.
A: That's right ... if you disconnect that device, you may lose data.
In fact, even with "-o sync" you can lose data if your programs have
information in buffers they haven't written out to a disk you disconnect,
or if you disconnect before the device finished saving data you wrote.
If you're lucky, your hardware will support low-power modes for USB
controllers while the system is asleep. Lots of hardware doesn't,
however. Shutting off the power to a USB controller is equivalent to
unplugging all the attached devices.
Software suspend normally powers down USB controllers, which is equivalent
to disconnecting all USB devices attached to your system.
Your system might well support low-power modes for its USB controllers
while the system is asleep, maintaining the connection, using true sleep
modes like "suspend-to-RAM" or "standby". (Don't write "disk" to the
/sys/power/state file; write "standby" or "mem".) We've not seen any
hardware that can use these modes through software suspend, although in
theory some systems might support "platform" or "firmware" modes that
won't break the USB connections.
Remember that it's always a bad idea to unplug a disk drive containing a
mounted filesystem. With USB that's true even when your system is asleep!
The safest thing is to unmount all USB-based filesystems before suspending
and remount them after resuming.
mounted filesystem. That's true even when your system is asleep! The
safest thing is to unmount all filesystems on removable media (such USB,
Firewire, CompactFlash, MMC, external SATA, or even IDE hotplug bays)
before suspending; then remount them after resuming.
Q: I upgraded the kernel from 2.6.15 to 2.6.16. Both kernels were
compiled with the similar configuration files. Anyway I found that
suspend to disk (and resume) is much slower on 2.6.16 compared to
2.6.15. Any idea for why that might happen or how can I speed it up?
A: This is because the size of the suspend image is now greater than
for 2.6.15 (by saving more data we can get more responsive system
after resume).
There's the /sys/power/image_size knob that controls the size of the
image. If you set it to 0 (eg. by echo 0 > /sys/power/image_size as
root), the 2.6.15 behavior should be restored. If it is still too
slow, take a look at suspend.sf.net -- userland suspend is faster and
supports LZF compression to speed it up further.

4
Documentation/power/video.txt
View File

@ -90,6 +90,7 @@ Table of known working notebooks:
Model hack (or "how to do it")
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acer Aspire 1406LC ole's late BIOS init (7), turn off DRI
Acer TM 230 s3_bios (2)
Acer TM 242FX vbetool (6)
Acer TM C110 video_post (8)
Acer TM C300 vga=normal (only suspend on console, not in X), vbetool (6) or video_post (8)
@ -115,6 +116,7 @@ Dell D610 vga=normal and X (possibly vbestate (6) too, but not tested)
Dell Inspiron 4000 ??? (*)
Dell Inspiron 500m ??? (*)
Dell Inspiron 510m ???
Dell Inspiron 5150 vbetool needed (6)
Dell Inspiron 600m ??? (*)
Dell Inspiron 8200 ??? (*)
Dell Inspiron 8500 ??? (*)
@ -125,6 +127,7 @@ HP NX7000 ??? (*)
HP Pavilion ZD7000 vbetool post needed, need open-source nv driver for X
HP Omnibook XE3 athlon version none (1)
HP Omnibook XE3GC none (1), video is S3 Savage/IX-MV
HP Omnibook XE3L-GF vbetool (6)
HP Omnibook 5150 none (1), (S1 also works OK)
IBM TP T20, model 2647-44G none (1), video is S3 Inc. 86C270-294 Savage/IX-MV, vesafb gets "interesting" but X work.
IBM TP A31 / Type 2652-M5G s3_mode (3) [works ok with BIOS 1.04 2002-08-23, but not at all with BIOS 1.11 2004-11-05 :-(]
@ -157,6 +160,7 @@ Sony Vaio vgn-s260 X or boot-radeon can init it (5)
Sony Vaio vgn-S580BH vga=normal, but suspend from X. Console will be blank unless you return to X.
Sony Vaio vgn-FS115B s3_bios (2),s3_mode (4)
Toshiba Libretto L5 none (1)
Toshiba Libretto 100CT/110CT vbetool (6)
Toshiba Portege 3020CT s3_mode (3)
Toshiba Satellite 4030CDT s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)
Toshiba Satellite 4080XCDT s3_mode (3) (S1 also works OK)

7
Documentation/rtc.txt
View File

@ -44,8 +44,10 @@ normal timer interrupt, which is 100Hz.
Programming and/or enabling interrupt frequencies greater than 64Hz is
only allowed by root. This is perhaps a bit conservative, but we don't want
an evil user generating lots of IRQs on a slow 386sx-16, where it might have
a negative impact on performance. Note that the interrupt handler is only
a few lines of code to minimize any possibility of this effect.
a negative impact on performance. This 64Hz limit can be changed by writing
a different value to /proc/sys/dev/rtc/max-user-freq. Note that the
interrupt handler is only a few lines of code to minimize any possibility
of this effect.
Also, if the kernel time is synchronized with an external source, the
kernel will write the time back to the CMOS clock every 11 minutes. In
@ -81,6 +83,7 @@ that will be using this driver.
*/
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <linux/rtc.h>
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
#include <sys/time.h>

2
Documentation/scsi/00-INDEX
View File

@ -30,8 +30,6 @@ aic7xxx.txt
- info on driver for Adaptec controllers
aic7xxx_old.txt
- info on driver for Adaptec controllers, old generation
cpqfc.txt
- info on driver for Compaq Tachyon TS adapters
dpti.txt
- info on driver for DPT SmartRAID and Adaptec I2O RAID based adapters
dtc3x80.txt

13
Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
View File

@ -1,3 +1,16 @@
1 Release Date : Wed Feb 03 14:31:44 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com>
2 Current Version : 00.00.02.04
3 Older Version : 00.00.02.04
i. Remove superflous instance_lock
gets rid of the otherwise superflous instance_lock and avoids an unsave
unsynchronized access in the error handler.
- Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
1 Release Date : Wed Feb 03 14:31:44 PST 2006 - Sumant Patro <Sumant.Patro@lsil.com>
2 Current Version : 00.00.02.04
3 Older Version : 00.00.02.04

8
Documentation/scsi/aacraid.txt
View File

@ -24,10 +24,10 @@ Supported Cards/Chipsets
9005:0285:9005:0296 Adaptec 2240S (SabreExpress)
9005:0285:9005:0290 Adaptec 2410SA (Jaguar)
9005:0285:9005:0293 Adaptec 21610SA (Corsair-16)
9005:0285:103c:3227 Adaptec 2610SA (Bearcat)
9005:0285:103c:3227 Adaptec 2610SA (Bearcat HP release)
9005:0285:9005:0292 Adaptec 2810SA (Corsair-8)
9005:0285:9005:0294 Adaptec Prowler
9005:0286:9005:029d Adaptec 2420SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:029d Adaptec 2420SA (Intruder HP release)
9005:0286:9005:029c Adaptec 2620SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:029b Adaptec 2820SA (Intruder)
9005:0286:9005:02a7 Adaptec 2830SA (Skyray)
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Supported Cards/Chipsets
9005:0285:9005:0297 Adaptec 4005SAS (AvonPark)
9005:0285:9005:0299 Adaptec 4800SAS (Marauder-X)
9005:0285:9005:029a Adaptec 4805SAS (Marauder-E)
9005:0286:9005:02a2 Adaptec 4810SAS (Hurricane)
9005:0286:9005:02a2 Adaptec 3800SAS (Hurricane44)
1011:0046:9005:0364 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang)
1011:0046:9005:0365 Adaptec 5400S (Mustang)
9005:0283:9005:0283 Adaptec Catapult (3210S with arc firmware)
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Supported Cards/Chipsets
9005:0286:9005:02a1 ICP ICP9087MA (Lancer)
9005:0286:9005:02a4 ICP ICP9085LI (Marauder-X)
9005:0286:9005:02a5 ICP ICP5085BR (Marauder-E)
9005:0286:9005:02a3 ICP ICP5085AU (Hurricane)
9005:0286:9005:02a3 ICP ICP5445AU (Hurricane44)
9005:0286:9005:02a6 ICP ICP9067MA (Intruder-6)
9005:0286:9005:02a9 ICP ICP5087AU (Skyray)
9005:0286:9005:02aa ICP ICP5047AU (Skyray)

272
Documentation/scsi/cpqfc.txt
View File

@ -1,272 +0,0 @@
Notes for CPQFCTS driver for Compaq Tachyon TS
Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapter, PCI 64-bit, 66MHz
for Linux (RH 6.1, 6.2 kernel 2.2.12-32, 2.2.14-5)
SMP tested
Tested in single and dual HBA configuration, 32 and 64bit busses,
33 and 66MHz. Only supports FC-AL.
SEST size 512 Exchanges (simultaneous I/Os) limited by module kmalloc()
max of 128k bytes contiguous.
Ver 2.5.4 Oct 03, 2002
* fixed memcpy of sense buffer in ioctl to copy the smaller defined size
Ver 2.5.3 Aug 01, 2002
* fix the passthru ioctl to handle the Scsi_Cmnd->request being a pointer
Ver 2.5.1 Jul 30, 2002
* fix ioctl to pay attention to the specified LUN.
Ver 2.5.0 Nov 29, 2001
* eliminated io_request_lock. This change makes the driver specific
to the 2.5.x kernels.
* silenced excessively noisy printks.
Ver 2.1.2 July 23, 2002
* initialize DumCmnd->lun in cpqfcTS_ioctl (used in fcFindLoggedInPorts as LUN index)
Ver 2.1.1 Oct 18, 2001
* reinitialize Cmnd->SCp.sent_command (used to identify commands as
passthrus) on calling scsi_done, since the scsi mid layer does not
use (or reinitialize) this field to prevent subsequent comands from
having it set incorrectly.
Ver 2.1.0 Aug 27, 2001
* Revise driver to use new kernel 2.4.x PCI DMA API, instead of
virt_to_bus(). (enables driver to work w/ ia64 systems with >2Gb RAM.)
Rework main scatter-gather code to handle cases where SG element
lengths are larger than 0x7FFFF bytes and use as many scatter
gather pages as necessary. (Steve Cameron)
* Makefile changes to bring cpqfc into line w/ rest of SCSI drivers
(thanks to Keith Owens)
Ver 2.0.5 Aug 06, 2001
* Reject non-existent luns in the driver rather than letting the
hardware do it. (some HW behaves differently than others in this area.)
* Changed Makefile to rely on "make dep" instead of explicit dependencies
* ifdef'ed out fibre channel analyzer triggering debug code
* fixed a jiffies wrapping issue
Ver 2.0.4 Aug 01, 2001
* Incorporated fix for target device reset from Steeleye
* Fixed passthrough ioctl so it doesn't hang.
* Fixed hang in launch_FCworker_thread() that occurred on some machines.
* Avoid problem when number of volumes in a single cabinet > 8
Ver 2.0.2 July 23, 2001
Changed the semiphore changes so the driver would compile in 2.4.7.
This version is for 2.4.7 and beyond.
Ver 2.0.1 May 7, 2001
Merged version 1.3.6 fixes into version 2.0.0.
Ver 2.0.0 May 7, 2001
Fixed problem so spinlock is being initialized to UNLOCKED.
Fixed updated driver so it compiles in the 2.4 tree.
Ver 1.3.6 Feb 27, 2001
Added Target_Device_Reset function for SCSI error handling
Fixed problem with not reseting addressing mode after implicit logout
Ver 1.3.4 Sep 7, 2000
Added Modinfo information
Fixed problem with statically linking the driver
Ver 1.3.3, Aug 23, 2000
Fixed device/function number in ioctl
Ver 1.3.2, July 27, 2000
Add include for Alpha compile on 2.2.14 kernel (cpq*i2c.c)
Change logic for different FCP-RSP sense_buffer location for HSG80 target
And search for Agilent Tachyon XL2 HBAs (not finished! - in test)
Tested with
(storage):
Compaq RA-4x000, RAID firmware ver 2.40 - 2.54
Seagate FC drives model ST39102FC, rev 0006
Hitachi DK31CJ-72FC rev J8A8
IBM DDYF-T18350R rev F60K
Compaq FC-SCSI bridge w/ DLT 35/70 Gb DLT (tape)
(servers):
Compaq PL-1850R
Compaq PL-6500 Xeon (400MHz)
Compaq PL-8500 (500MHz, 66MHz, 64bit PCI)
Compaq Alpha DS20 (RH 6.1)
(hubs):
Vixel Rapport 1000 (7-port "dumb")
Gadzoox Gibralter (12-port "dumb")
Gadzoox Capellix 2000, 3000
(switches):
Brocade 2010, 2400, 2800, rev 2.0.3a (& later)
Gadzoox 3210 (Fabric blade beta)
Vixel 7100 (Fabric beta firmare - known hot plug issues)
using "qa_test" (esp. io_test script) suite modified from Unix tests.
Installation:
make menuconfig
(select SCSI low-level, Compaq FC HBA)
make modules
make modules_install
e.g. insmod -f cpqfc
Due to Fabric/switch delays, driver requires 4 seconds
to initialize. If adapters are found, there will be a entries at
/proc/scsi/cpqfcTS/*
sample contents of startup messages
*************************
scsi_register allocating 3596 bytes for CPQFCHBA
ioremap'd Membase: c887e600
HBA Tachyon RevId 1.2
Allocating 119808 for 576 Exchanges @ c0dc0000
Allocating 112904 for LinkQ @ c0c20000 (576 elements)
Allocating 110600 for TachSEST for 512 Exchanges
cpqfcTS: writing IMQ BASE 7C0000h PI 7C4000h
cpqfcTS: SEST c0e40000(virt): Wrote base E40000h @ c887e740
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E8h WWN: 500507650642499D SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/0
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000EFh WWN: 50000E100000D5A6 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/1
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E4h WWN: 21000020370097BB SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/2
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E2h WWN: 2100002037009946 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/3
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E1h WWN: 21000020370098FE SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/4
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000E0h WWN: 21000020370097B2 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/5
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000DCh WWN: 2100002037006CC1 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/6
cpqfcTS: New FC port 0000DAh WWN: 21000020370059F6 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/7
cpqfcTS: New FC port 00000Fh WWN: 500805F1FADB0E20 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/8
cpqfcTS: New FC port 000008h WWN: 500805F1FADB0EBA SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/9
cpqfcTS: New FC port 000004h WWN: 500805F1FADB1EB9 SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/10
cpqfcTS: New FC port 000002h WWN: 500805F1FADB1ADE SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/11
cpqfcTS: New FC port 000001h WWN: 500805F1FADBA2CA SCSI Chan/Trgt 0/12
scsi4 : Compaq FibreChannel HBA Tachyon TS HPFC-5166A/1.2: WWN 500508B200193F50
on PCI bus 0 device 0xa0fc irq 5 IObaseL 0x3400, MEMBASE 0xc6ef8600
PCI bus width 32 bits, bus speed 33 MHz
FCP-SCSI Driver v1.3.0
GBIC detected: Short-wave. LPSM 0h Monitor
scsi : 5 hosts.
Vendor: IBM Model: DDYF-T18350R Rev: F60K
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 03
Detected scsi disk sdb at scsi4, channel 0, id 0, lun 0
Vendor: HITACHI Model: DK31CJ-72FC Rev: J8A8
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdc at scsi4, channel 0, id 1, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdd at scsi4, channel 0, id 2, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sde at scsi4, channel 0, id 3, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdf at scsi4, channel 0, id 4, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdg at scsi4, channel 0, id 5, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdh at scsi4, channel 0, id 6, lun 0
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST39102FC Rev: 0006
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdi at scsi4, channel 0, id 7, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.48
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdj at scsi4, channel 0, id 8, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.48
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdk at scsi4, channel 0, id 8, lun 1
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.40
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdl at scsi4, channel 0, id 9, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.40
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdm at scsi4, channel 0, id 9, lun 1
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdn at scsi4, channel 0, id 10, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdo at scsi4, channel 0, id 11, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdp at scsi4, channel 0, id 11, lun 1
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdq at scsi4, channel 0, id 12, lun 0
Vendor: COMPAQ Model: LOGICAL VOLUME Rev: 2.54
Type: Direct-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02
Detected scsi disk sdr at scsi4, channel 0, id 12, lun 1
resize_dma_pool: unknown device type 12
resize_dma_pool: unknown device type 12
SCSI device sdb: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 35843670 [17501 MB] [17.5 GB]
sdb: sdb1
SCSI device sdc: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 144410880 [70513 MB] [70.5 GB]
sdc: sdc1
SCSI device sdd: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdd: sdd1
SCSI device sde: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sde: sde1
SCSI device sdf: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdf: sdf1
SCSI device sdg: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdg: sdg1
SCSI device sdh: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdh: sdh1
SCSI device sdi: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17783240 [8683 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdi: sdi1
SCSI device sdj: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2056160 [1003 MB] [1.0 GB]
sdj: sdj1
SCSI device sdk: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2052736 [1002 MB] [1.0 GB]
sdk: sdk1
SCSI device sdl: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdl: sdl1
SCSI device sdm: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 8380320 [4091 MB] [4.1 GB]
sdm: sdm1
SCSI device sdn: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdn: sdn1
SCSI device sdo: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdo: sdo1
SCSI device sdp: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 17764320 [8673 MB] [8.7 GB]
sdp: sdp1
SCSI device sdq: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2056160 [1003 MB] [1.0 GB]
sdq: sdq1
SCSI device sdr: hdwr sector= 512 bytes. Sectors= 2052736 [1002 MB] [1.0 GB]
sdr: sdr1
*************************
If a GBIC of type Short-wave, Long-wave, or Copper is detected, it will
print out; otherwise, "none" is displayed. If the cabling is correct
and a loop circuit is completed, you should see "Monitor"; otherwise,
"LoopFail" (on open circuit) or some LPSM number/state with bit 3 set.
ERRATA:
1. Normally, Linux Scsi queries FC devices with INQUIRY strings. All LUNs
found according to INQUIRY should get READ commands at sector 0 to find
partition table, etc. Older kernels only query the first 4 devices. Some
Linux kernels only look for one LUN per target (i.e. FC device).
2. Physically removing a device, or a malfunctioning system which hides a
device, leads to a 30-second timeout and subsequent _abort call.
In some process contexts, this will hang the kernel (crashing the system).
Single bit errors in frames and virtually all hot plugging events are
gracefully handled with internal driver timer and Abort processing.
3. Some SCSI drives with error conditions will not handle the 7 second timeout
in this software driver, leading to infinite retries on timed out SCSI commands.
The 7 secs balances the need to quickly recover from lost frames (esp. on sequence
initiatives) and time needed by older/slower/error-state drives in responding.
This can be easily changed in "Exchanges[].timeOut".
4. Due to the nature of FC soft addressing, there is no assurance that the
same LUNs (drives) will have the same path (e.g. /dev/sdb1) from one boot to
next. Dynamic soft address changes (i.e. 24-bit FC port_id) are
supported during run time (e.g. due to hot plug event) by the use of WWN to
SCSI Nexus (channel/target/LUN) mapping.
5. Compaq RA4x00 firmware version 2.54 and later supports SSP (Selective
Storage Presentation), which maps LUNs to a WWN. If RA4x00 firmware prior
2.54 (e.g. older controller) is used, or the FC HBA is replaced (another WWN
is used), logical volumes on the RA4x00 will no longer be visible.
Send questions/comments to:
Amy Vanzant-Hodge (fibrechannel@compaq.com)

92
Documentation/scsi/hptiop.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
HIGHPOINT ROCKETRAID 3xxx RAID DRIVER (hptiop)
Controller Register Map
-------------------------
The controller IOP is accessed via PCI BAR0.
BAR0 offset Register
0x10 Inbound Message Register 0
0x14 Inbound Message Register 1
0x18 Outbound Message Register 0
0x1C Outbound Message Register 1
0x20 Inbound Doorbell Register
0x24 Inbound Interrupt Status Register
0x28 Inbound Interrupt Mask Register
0x30 Outbound Interrupt Status Register
0x34 Outbound Interrupt Mask Register
0x40 Inbound Queue Port
0x44 Outbound Queue Port
I/O Request Workflow
----------------------
All queued requests are handled via inbound/outbound queue port.
A request packet can be allocated in either IOP or host memory.
To send a request to the controller:
- Get a free request packet by reading the inbound queue port or
allocate a free request in host DMA coherent memory.
The value returned from the inbound queue port is an offset
relative to the IOP BAR0.
Requests allocated in host memory must be aligned on 32-bytes boundary.
- Fill the packet.
- Post the packet to IOP by writing it to inbound queue. For requests
allocated in IOP memory, write the offset to inbound queue port. For
requests allocated in host memory, write (0x80000000|(bus_addr>>5))
to the inbound queue port.
- The IOP process the request. When the request is completed, it
will be put into outbound queue. An outbound interrupt will be
generated.
For requests allocated in IOP memory, the request offset is posted to
outbound queue.
For requests allocated in host memory, (0x80000000|(bus_addr>>5))
is posted to the outbound queue. If IOP_REQUEST_FLAG_OUTPUT_CONTEXT
flag is set in the request, the low 32-bit context value will be
posted instead.
- The host read the outbound queue and complete the request.
For requests allocated in IOP memory, the host driver free the request
by writing it to the outbound queue.
Non-queued requests (reset/flush etc) can be sent via inbound message
register 0. An outbound message with the same value indicates the completion
of an inbound message.
User-level Interface
---------------------
The driver exposes following sysfs attributes:
NAME R/W Description
driver-version R driver version string
firmware-version R firmware version string
The driver registers char device "hptiop" to communicate with HighPoint RAID
management software. Its ioctl routine acts as a general binary interface
between the IOP firmware and HighPoint RAID management software. New management
functions can be implemented in application/firmware without modification
in driver code.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Copyright (C) 2006 HighPoint Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
linux@highpoint-tech.com
http://www.highpoint-tech.com

9
Documentation/serial/driver
View File

@ -214,12 +214,13 @@ hardware.
The interaction of the iflag bits is as follows (parity error
given as an example):
Parity error INPCK IGNPAR
None n/a n/a character received
Yes n/a 0 character discarded
Yes 0 1 character received, marked as
n/a 0 n/a character received, marked as
TTY_NORMAL
Yes 1 1 character received, marked as
None 1 n/a character received, marked as
TTY_NORMAL
Yes 1 0 character received, marked as
TTY_PARITY
Yes 1 1 character discarded
Other flags may be used (eg, xon/xoff characters) if your
hardware supports hardware "soft" flow control.

19
Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
View File

@ -366,7 +366,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for C-Media CMI8338 and 8738 PCI sound cards.
mpu_port - 0x300,0x310,0x320,0x330, 0 = disable (default)
mpu_port - 0x300,0x310,0x320,0x330 = legacy port,
1 = integrated PCI port,
0 = disable (default)
fm_port - 0x388 (default), 0 = disable (default)
soft_ac3 - Software-conversion of raw SPDIF packets (model 033 only)
(default = 1)
@ -468,7 +470,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for multifunction CS5535 companion PCI device
This module supports multiple cards.
The power-management is supported.
Module snd-dt019x
-----------------
@ -707,8 +709,10 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module snd-hda-intel
--------------------
Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ICH7), ATI SB450,
VIA VT8251/VT8237A
Module for Intel HD Audio (ICH6, ICH6M, ESB2, ICH7, ICH8),
ATI SB450, SB600, RS600,
VIA VT8251/VT8237A,
SIS966, ULI M5461
model - force the model name
position_fix - Fix DMA pointer (0 = auto, 1 = none, 2 = POSBUF, 3 = FIFO size)
@ -778,6 +782,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
AD1981
basic 3-jack (default)
hp HP nx6320
thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T60/X60/Z60
AD1986A
6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default)
@ -1633,9 +1638,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
About capture IBL, see the description of snd-vx222 module.
Note: the driver is build only when CONFIG_ISA is set.
Note2: snd-vxp440 driver is merged to snd-vxpocket driver since
Note: snd-vxp440 driver is merged to snd-vxpocket driver since
ALSA 1.0.10.
The power-management is supported.
@ -1662,8 +1665,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
Module for Sound Core PDAudioCF sound card.
Note: the driver is build only when CONFIG_ISA is set.
The power-management is supported.

50
Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
View File

@ -4215,7 +4215,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
struct snd_rawmidi *rmidi;
snd_mpu401_uart_new(card, 0, MPU401_HW_MPU401, port, integrated,
snd_mpu401_uart_new(card, 0, MPU401_HW_MPU401, port, info_flags,
irq, irq_flags, &rmidi);
]]>
</programlisting>
@ -4242,15 +4242,36 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
</para>
<para>
The 5th argument is bitflags for additional information.
When the i/o port address above is a part of the PCI i/o
region, the MPU401 i/o port might have been already allocated
(reserved) by the driver itself. In such a case, pass non-zero
to the 5th argument
(<parameter>integrated</parameter>). Otherwise, pass 0 to it,
(reserved) by the driver itself. In such a case, pass a bit flag
<constant>MPU401_INFO_INTEGRATED</constant>,
and
the mpu401-uart layer will allocate the i/o ports by itself.
</para>
<para>
When the controller supports only the input or output MIDI stream,
pass <constant>MPU401_INFO_INPUT</constant> or
<constant>MPU401_INFO_OUTPUT</constant> bitflag, respectively.
Then the rawmidi instance is created as a single stream.
</para>
<para>
<constant>MPU401_INFO_MMIO</constant> bitflag is used to change
the access method to MMIO (via readb and writeb) instead of
iob and outb. In this case, you have to pass the iomapped address
to <function>snd_mpu401_uart_new()</function>.
</para>
<para>
When <constant>MPU401_INFO_TX_IRQ</constant> is set, the output
stream isn't checked in the default interrupt handler. The driver
needs to call <function>snd_mpu401_uart_interrupt_tx()</function>
by itself to start processing the output stream in irq handler.
</para>
<para>
Usually, the port address corresponds to the command port and
port + 1 corresponds to the data port. If not, you may change
@ -5333,7 +5354,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
<informalexample>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
snd_info_set_text_ops(entry, chip, read_size, my_proc_read);
snd_info_set_text_ops(entry, chip, my_proc_read);
]]>
</programlisting>
</informalexample>
@ -5394,29 +5415,12 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
<informalexample>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
entry->c.text.write_size = 256;
entry->c.text.write = my_proc_write;
]]>
</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</para>
<para>
The buffer size for read is set to 1024 implicitly by
<function>snd_info_set_text_ops()</function>. It should suffice
in most cases (the size will be aligned to
<constant>PAGE_SIZE</constant> anyway), but if you need to handle
very large text files, you can set it explicitly, too.
<informalexample>
<programlisting>
<![CDATA[
entry->c.text.read_size = 65536;
]]>
</programlisting>
</informalexample>
</para>
<para>
For the write callback, you can use
<function>snd_info_get_line()</function> to get a text line, and
@ -5562,7 +5566,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
power status.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Call <function>snd_pcm_suspend_all()</function> to suspend the running PCM streams.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>If AC97 codecs are used, call
<function>snd_ac97_resume()</function> for each codec.</para></listitem>
<function>snd_ac97_suspend()</function> for each codec.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Save the register values if necessary.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Stop the hardware if necessary.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Disable the PCI device by calling

95
Documentation/sparc/sbus_drivers.txt
View File

@ -25,42 +25,84 @@ the bits necessary to run your device. The most commonly
used members of this structure, and their typical usage,
will be detailed below.
Here is how probing is performed by an SBUS driver
under Linux:
Here is a piece of skeleton code for perofming a device
probe in an SBUS driverunder Linux:
static void init_one_mydevice(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
static int __devinit mydevice_probe_one(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
{
struct mysdevice *mp = kzalloc(sizeof(*mp), GFP_KERNEL);
if (!mp)
return -ENODEV;
...
dev_set_drvdata(&sdev->ofdev.dev, mp);
return 0;
...
}
static int mydevice_match(struct sbus_dev *sdev)
static int __devinit mydevice_probe(struct of_device *dev,
const struct of_device_id *match)
{
if (some_criteria(sdev))
return 1;
return 0;
struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
return mydevice_probe_one(sdev);
}
static void mydevice_probe(void)
static int __devexit mydevice_remove(struct of_device *dev)
{
struct sbus_bus *sbus;
struct sbus_dev *sdev;
struct sbus_dev *sdev = to_sbus_device(&dev->dev);
struct mydevice *mp = dev_get_drvdata(&dev->dev);
for_each_sbus(sbus) {
for_each_sbusdev(sdev, sbus) {
if (mydevice_match(sdev))
init_one_mydevice(sdev);
}
}
return mydevice_remove_one(sdev, mp);
}
All this does is walk through all SBUS devices in the
system, checks each to see if it is of the type which
your driver is written for, and if so it calls the init
routine to attach the device and prepare to drive it.
static struct of_device_id mydevice_match[] = {
{
.name = "mydevice",
},
{},
};
"init_one_mydevice" might do things like allocate software
state structures, map in I/O registers, place the hardware
into an initialized state, etc.
MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(of, mydevice_match);
static struct of_platform_driver mydevice_driver = {
.name = "mydevice",
.match_table = mydevice_match,
.probe = mydevice_probe,
.remove = __devexit_p(mydevice_remove),
};
static int __init mydevice_init(void)
{
return of_register_driver(&mydevice_driver, &sbus_bus_type);
}
static void __exit mydevice_exit(void)
{
of_unregister_driver(&mydevice_driver);
}
module_init(mydevice_init);
module_exit(mydevice_exit);
The mydevice_match table is a series of entries which
describes what SBUS devices your driver is meant for. In the
simplest case you specify a string for the 'name' field. Every
SBUS device with a 'name' property matching your string will
be passed one-by-one to your .probe method.
You should store away your device private state structure
pointer in the drvdata area so that you can retrieve it later on
in your .remove method.
Any memory allocated, registers mapped, IRQs registered,
etc. must be undone by your .remove method so that all resources
of your device are relased by the time it returns.
You should _NOT_ use the for_each_sbus(), for_each_sbusdev(),
and for_all_sbusdev() interfaces. They are deprecated, will be
removed, and no new driver should reference them ever.
Mapping and Accessing I/O Registers
@ -263,10 +305,3 @@ discussed above and plus it handles both PCI and SBUS boards.
Lance driver abuses consistent mappings for data transfer.
It is a nifty trick which we do not particularly recommend...
Just check it out and know that it's legal.
Bad examples, do NOT use
drivers/video/cgsix.c
This one uses result of sbus_ioremap as if it is an address.
This does NOT work on sparc64 and therefore is broken. We will
convert it at a later date.

34
Documentation/sparse.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
Copyright 2004 Linus Torvalds
Copyright 2004 Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz>
Copyright 2006 Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Using sparse for typechecking
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ -41,15 +42,8 @@ sure that bitwise types don't get mixed up (little-endian vs big-endian
vs cpu-endian vs whatever), and there the constant "0" really _is_
special.
Use
make C=[12] CF=-Wbitwise
or you don't get any checking at all.
Where to get sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Getting sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
With git, you can just get it from
@ -65,8 +59,20 @@ Once you have it, just do
make
make install
as your regular user, and it will install sparse in your ~/bin directory.
After that, doing a kernel make with "make C=1" will run sparse on all the
C files that get recompiled, or with "make C=2" will run sparse on the
files whether they need to be recompiled or not (ie the latter is fast way
to check the whole tree if you have already built it).
as a regular user, and it will install sparse in your ~/bin directory.
Using sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Do a kernel make with "make C=1" to run sparse on all the C files that get
recompiled, or use "make C=2" to run sparse on the files whether they need to
be recompiled or not. The latter is a fast way to check the whole tree if you
have already built it.
The optional make variable CF can be used to pass arguments to sparse. The
build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform endianness
checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__:
make C=2 CF="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__"
These checks are disabled by default as they generate a host of warnings.

13
Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
View File

@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ Currently, these files are in /proc/sys/vm:
- drop-caches
- zone_reclaim_mode
- zone_reclaim_interval
- panic_on_oom
==============================================================
@ -178,3 +179,15 @@ Time is set in seconds and set by default to 30 seconds.
Reduce the interval if undesired off node allocations occur. However, too
frequent scans will have a negative impact onoff node allocation performance.
=============================================================
panic_on_oom
This enables or disables panic on out-of-memory feature. If this is set to 1,
the kernel panics when out-of-memory happens. If this is set to 0, the kernel
will kill some rogue process, called oom_killer. Usually, oom_killer can kill
rogue processes and system will survive. If you want to panic the system
rather than killing rogue processes, set this to 1.
The default value is 0.

5
Documentation/sysrq.txt
View File

@ -115,8 +115,9 @@ trojan program is running at console and which could grab your password
when you would try to login. It will kill all programs on given console
and thus letting you make sure that the login prompt you see is actually
the one from init, not some trojan program.
IMPORTANT:In its true form it is not a true SAK like the one in :IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT:c2 compliant systems, and it should be mistook as such. :IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT: In its true form it is not a true SAK like the one in a :IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT: c2 compliant system, and it should not be mistaken as :IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT: such. :IMPORTANT
It seems other find it useful as (System Attention Key) which is
useful when you want to exit a program that will not let you switch consoles.
(For example, X or a svgalib program.)

32
Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
View File

@ -29,14 +29,13 @@ if usbmon is built into the kernel.
# mount -t debugfs none_debugs /sys/kernel/debug
# modprobe usbmon
#
Verify that bus sockets are present.
[root@lembas zaitcev]# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon
# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon
1s 1t 2s 2t 3s 3t 4s 4t
[root@lembas zaitcev]#
# ls /sys/kernel
#
2. Find which bus connects to the desired device
@ -76,7 +75,7 @@ that the file size is not excessive for your favourite editor.
* Raw text data format
The '0t' type data consists of a stream of events, such as URB submission,
The '1t' type data consists of a stream of events, such as URB submission,
URB callback, submission error. Every event is a text line, which consists
of whitespace separated words. The number of position of words may depend
on the event type, but there is a set of words, common for all types.
@ -97,20 +96,25 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
Zi Zo Isochronous input and output
Ii Io Interrupt input and output
Bi Bo Bulk input and output
Device address and Endpoint number are decimal numbers with leading zeroes
or 3 and 2 positions, correspondingly.
- URB Status. This field makes no sense for submissions, but is present
to help scripts with parsing. In error case, it contains the error code.
In case of a setup packet, it contains a Setup Tag. If scripts read a number
in this field, they proceed to read Data Length. Otherwise, they read
the setup packet before reading the Data Length.
Device address and Endpoint number are 3-digit and 2-digit (respectively)
decimal numbers, with leading zeroes.
- URB Status. In most cases, this field contains a number, sometimes negative,
which represents a "status" field of the URB. This field makes no sense for
submissions, but is present anyway to help scripts with parsing. When an
error occurs, the field contains the error code. In case of a submission of
a Control packet, this field contains a Setup Tag instead of an error code.
It is easy to tell whether the Setup Tag is present because it is never a
number. Thus if scripts find a number in this field, they proceed to read
Data Length. If they find something else, like a letter, they read the setup
packet before reading the Data Length.
- Setup packet, if present, consists of 5 words: one of each for bmRequestType,
bRequest, wValue, wIndex, wLength, as specified by the USB Specification 2.0.
These words are safe to decode if Setup Tag was 's'. Otherwise, the setup
packet was present, but not captured, and the fields contain filler.
- Data Length. This is the actual length in the URB.
- Data Length. For submissions, this is the requested length. For callbacks,
this is the actual length.
- Data tag. The usbmon may not always capture data, even if length is nonzero.
Only if tag is '=', the data words are present.
The data words are present only if this tag is '='.
- Data words follow, in big endian hexadecimal format. Notice that they are
not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make
it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes.

4
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
View File

@ -87,7 +87,7 @@
86 -> Osprey 101/151 w/ svid
87 -> Osprey 200/201/250/251
88 -> Osprey 200/250 [0070:ff01]
89 -> Osprey 210/220
89 -> Osprey 210/220/230
90 -> Osprey 500 [0070:ff02]
91 -> Osprey 540 [0070:ff04]
92 -> Osprey 2000 [0070:ff03]
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@
110 -> IVC-100 [ff00:a132]
111 -> IVC-120G [ff00:a182,ff01:a182,ff02:a182,ff03:a182,ff04:a182,ff05:a182,ff06:a182,ff07:a182,ff08:a182,ff09:a182,ff0a:a182,ff0b:a182,ff0c:a182,ff0d:a182,ff0e:a182,ff0f:a182]
112 -> pcHDTV HD-2000 TV [7063:2000]
113 -> Twinhan DST + clones [11bd:0026,1822:0001,270f:fc00]
113 -> Twinhan DST + clones [11bd:0026,1822:0001,270f:fc00,1822:0026]
114 -> Winfast VC100 [107d:6607]
115 -> Teppro TEV-560/InterVision IV-560
116 -> SIMUS GVC1100 [aa6a:82b2]

9
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
View File

@ -15,7 +15,7 @@
14 -> KWorld/VStream XPert DVB-T [17de:08a6]
15 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T1 [18ac:db00]
16 -> KWorld LTV883RF
17 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 3 Gold-Q [18ac:d810]
17 -> DViCO FusionHDTV 3 Gold-Q [18ac:d810,18ac:d800]
18 -> Hauppauge Nova-T DVB-T [0070:9002,0070:9001]
19 -> Conexant DVB-T reference design [14f1:0187]
20 -> Provideo PV259 [1540:2580]
@ -40,8 +40,13 @@
39 -> KWorld DVB-S 100 [17de:08b2]
40 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:9400,0070:9402]
41 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid (Low Profile) [0070:9800,0070:9802]
42 -> digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T Pro [1822:0025]
42 -> digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T Pro [1822:0025,1822:0019]
43 -> KWorld/VStream XPert DVB-T with cx22702 [17de:08a1]
44 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Digital [18ac:db50,18ac:db54]
45 -> KWorld HardwareMpegTV XPert [17de:0840]
46 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Hybrid [18ac:db40,18ac:db44]
47 -> pcHDTV HD5500 HDTV [7063:5500]
48 -> Kworld MCE 200 Deluxe [17de:0841]
49 -> PixelView PlayTV P7000 [1554:4813]
50 -> NPG Tech Real TV FM Top 10 [14f1:0842]
51 -> WinFast DTV2000 H [107d:665e]

1
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
View File

@ -93,3 +93,4 @@
92 -> AVerMedia A169 B1 [1461:6360]
93 -> Medion 7134 Bridge #2 [16be:0005]
94 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T Hybrid Cardbus [5168:3306,5168:3502]
95 -> LifeView FlyVIDEO3000 (NTSC) [5169:0138]

3
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.tuner
View File

@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ tuner=60 - Thomson DTT 761X (ATSC/NTSC)
tuner=61 - Tena TNF9533-D/IF/TNF9533-B/DF
tuner=62 - Philips TEA5767HN FM Radio
tuner=63 - Philips FMD1216ME MK3 Hybrid Tuner
tuner=64 - LG TDVS-H062F/TUA6034
tuner=64 - LG TDVS-H06xF
tuner=65 - Ymec TVF66T5-B/DFF
tuner=66 - LG TALN series
tuner=67 - Philips TD1316 Hybrid Tuner
@ -71,3 +71,4 @@ tuner=69 - Tena TNF 5335 and similar models
tuner=70 - Samsung TCPN 2121P30A
tuner=71 - Xceive xc3028
tuner=72 - Thomson FE6600
tuner=73 - Samsung TCPG 6121P30A

203
Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt
View File

@ -185,207 +185,10 @@ this work is documented at the video4linux2 site listed below.
9.0 --- A sample program using v4lgrabber,
This program is a simple image grabber that will copy a frame from the
v4lgrab is a simple image grabber that will copy a frame from the
first video device, /dev/video0 to standard output in portable pixmap
format (.ppm) Using this like: 'v4lgrab | convert - c-qcam.jpg'
produced this picture of me at
http://mug.sys.virginia.edu/~drf5n/extras/c-qcam.jpg
-------------------- 8< ---------------- 8< -----------------------------
/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */
/*
* Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program
*
* Compile with:
* gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab
* Use as:
* v4lgrab >image.ppm
*
* Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org>
* Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c
* with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu).
*
*/
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <linux/types.h>
#include <linux/videodev.h>
#define FILE "/dev/video0"
/* Stole this from tvset.c */
#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b) \
{ \
switch (format) \
{ \
case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY: \
switch (depth) \
{ \
case 4: \
case 6: \
case 8: \
(r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\
break; \
\
case 16: \
(r) = (g) = (b) = \
*((unsigned short *) buf); \
buf += 2; \
break; \
} \
break; \
\
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565: \
{ \
unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf; \
(r) = tmp&0xF800; \
(g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00; \
(b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800; \
buf += 2; \
} \
break; \
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555: \
(r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8; \
(g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8; \
(b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8; \
buf += 2; \
break; \
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24: \
(r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8; \
(b) = buf[2] << 8; \
buf += 3; \
break; \
\
default: \
fprintf(stderr, \
"Format %d not yet supported\n", \
format); \
} \
}
int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) {
long i, tot = 0;
for (i=0;i<size*3;i++)
tot += image[i];
*brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3;
return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130);
}
int main(int argc, char ** argv)
{
int fd = open(FILE, O_RDONLY), f;
struct video_capability cap;
struct video_window win;
struct video_picture vpic;
unsigned char *buffer, *src;
int bpp = 24, r, g, b;
unsigned int i, src_depth;
if (fd < 0) {
perror(FILE);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOGCAP");
fprintf(stderr, "(" FILE " not a video4linux device?)\n");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOCGWIN");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOCGPICT");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) {
vpic.depth=8;
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY; /* 8bit grey */
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.depth=6;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.depth=4;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
}
}
} else {
vpic.depth=24;
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565;
vpic.depth=16;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555;
vpic.depth=15;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
return -1;
}
}
}
}
buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp);
if (!buffer) {
fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n");
exit(1);
}
do {
int newbright;
read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp);
f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright);
if (f) {
vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8);
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
perror("VIDIOSPICT");
break;
}
}
} while (f);
fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height);
src = buffer;
for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) {
READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b);
fputc(r>>8, stdout);
fputc(g>>8, stdout);
fputc(b>>8, stdout);
}
close(fd);
return 0;
}
-------------------- 8< ---------------- 8< -----------------------------
format (.ppm) To produce .jpg output, you can use it like this:
'v4lgrab | convert - c-qcam.jpg'
10.0 --- Other Information

23
Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
View File

@ -33,6 +33,21 @@ Inputs/outputs: Composite and S-video
Norms: PAL, SECAM (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
Card number: 7
AverMedia 6 Eyes AVS6EYES:
* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
* Samsung ks0127 TV decoder
* Conexant bt866 TV encoder
Drivers to use: videodev, i2c-core, i2c-algo-bit,
videocodec, ks0127, bt866, zr36060, zr36067
Inputs/outputs: Six physical inputs. 1-6 are composite,
1-2, 3-4, 5-6 doubles as S-video,
1-3 triples as component.
One composite output.
Norms: PAL, SECAM (720x576 @ 25 fps), NTSC (720x480 @ 29.97 fps)
Card number: 8
Not autodetected, card=8 is necessary.
Linux Media Labs LML33:
* Zoran zr36067 PCI controller
* Zoran zr36060 MJPEG codec
@ -192,6 +207,10 @@ Micronas vpx3220a TV decoder
was introduced in 1996, is used in the DC30 and DC30+ and
can handle: PAL B/G/H/I, PAL N, PAL M, NTSC M, NTSC 44, PAL 60, SECAM,NTSC Comb
Samsung ks0127 TV decoder
is used in the AVS6EYES card and
can handle: NTSC-M/N/44, PAL-M/N/B/G/H/I/D/K/L and SECAM
===========================
1.2 What the TV encoder can do an what not
@ -221,6 +240,10 @@ ITT mse3000 TV encoder
was introduced in 1991, is used in the DC10 old
can generate: PAL , NTSC , SECAM
Conexant bt866 TV encoder
is used in AVS6EYES, and
can generate: NTSC/PAL, PAL­M, PAL­N
The adv717x, should be able to produce PAL N. But you find nothing PAL N
specific in the registers. Seem that you have to reuse a other standard
to generate PAL N, maybe it would work if you use the PAL M settings.

69
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-calling.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
This page describes how to make calls to the firmware api.
How to call
===========
The preferred calling convention is known as the firmware mailbox. The
mailboxes are basically a fixed length array that serves as the call-stack.
Firmware mailboxes can be located by searching the encoder and decoder memory
for a 16 byte signature. That signature will be located on a 256-byte boundary.
Signature:
0x78, 0x56, 0x34, 0x12, 0x12, 0x78, 0x56, 0x34,
0x34, 0x12, 0x78, 0x56, 0x56, 0x34, 0x12, 0x78
The firmware implements 20 mailboxes of 20 32-bit words. The first 10 are
reserved for API calls. The second 10 are used by the firmware for event
notification.
Index Name
----- ----
0 Flags
1 Command
2 Return value
3 Timeout
4-19 Parameter/Result
The flags are defined in the following table. The direction is from the
perspective of the firmware.
Bit Direction Purpose
--- --------- -------
2 O Firmware has processed the command.
1 I Driver has finished setting the parameters.
0 I Driver is using this mailbox.
The command is a 32-bit enumerator. The API specifics may be found in the
fw-*-api.txt documents.
The return value is a 32-bit enumerator. Only two values are currently defined:
0=success and -1=command undefined.
There are 16 parameters/results 32-bit fields. The driver populates these fields
with values for all the parameters required by the call. The driver overwrites
these fields with result values returned by the call. The API specifics may be
found in the fw-*-api.txt documents.
The timeout value protects the card from a hung driver thread. If the driver
doesn't handle the completed call within the timeout specified, the firmware
will reset that mailbox.
To make an API call, the driver iterates over each mailbox looking for the
first one available (bit 0 has been cleared). The driver sets that bit, fills
in the command enumerator, the timeout value and any required parameters. The
driver then sets the parameter ready bit (bit 1). The firmware scans the
mailboxes for pending commands, processes them, sets the result code, populates
the result value array with that call's return values and sets the call
complete bit (bit 2). Once bit 2 is set, the driver should retrieve the results
and clear all the flags. If the driver does not perform this task within the
time set in the timeout register, the firmware will reset that mailbox.
Event notifications are sent from the firmware to the host. The host tells the
firmware which events it is interested in via an API call. That call tells the
firmware which notification mailbox to use. The firmware signals the host via
an interrupt. Only the 16 Results fields are used, the Flags, Command, Return
value and Timeout words are not used.

319
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-decoder-api.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
Decoder firmware API description
================================
Note: this API is part of the decoder firmware, so it's cx23415 only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_PING_FW
Enum 0/0x00
Description
This API call does nothing. It may be used to check if the firmware
is responding.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_START_PLAYBACK
Enum 1/0x01
Description
Begin or resume playback.
Param[0]
0 based frame number in GOP to begin playback from.
Param[1]
Specifies the number of muted audio frames to play before normal
audio resumes.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_STOP_PLAYBACK
Enum 2/0x02
Description
Ends playback and clears all decoder buffers. If PTS is not zero,
playback stops at specified PTS.
Param[0]
Display 0=last frame, 1=black
Param[1]
PTS low
Param[2]
PTS high
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_PLAYBACK_SPEED
Enum 3/0x03
Description
Playback stream at speed other than normal. There are two modes of
operation:
Smooth: host transfers entire stream and firmware drops unused
frames.
Coarse: host drops frames based on indexing as required to achieve
desired speed.
Param[0]
Bitmap:
0:7 0 normal
1 fast only "1.5 times"
n nX fast, 1/nX slow
30 Framedrop:
'0' during 1.5 times play, every other B frame is dropped
'1' during 1.5 times play, stream is unchanged (bitrate
must not exceed 8mbps)
31 Speed:
'0' slow
'1' fast
Param[1]
Direction: 0=forward, 1=reverse
Param[2]
Picture mask:
1=I frames
3=I, P frames
7=I, P, B frames
Param[3]
B frames per GOP (for reverse play only)
Param[4]
Mute audio: 0=disable, 1=enable
Param[5]
Display 0=frame, 1=field
Param[6]
Specifies the number of muted audio frames to play before normal audio
resumes.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_STEP_VIDEO
Enum 5/0x05
Description
Each call to this API steps the playback to the next unit defined below
in the current playback direction.
Param[0]
0=frame, 1=top field, 2=bottom field
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_DMA_BLOCK_SIZE
Enum 8/0x08
Description
Set DMA transfer block size. Counterpart to API 0xC9
Param[0]
DMA transfer block size in bytes. A different size may be specified
when issuing the DMA transfer command.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_GET_XFER_INFO
Enum 9/0x09
Description
This API call may be used to detect an end of stream condtion.
Result[0]
Stream type
Result[1]
Address offset
Result[2]
Maximum bytes to transfer
Result[3]
Buffer fullness
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_GET_DMA_STATUS
Enum 10/0x0A
Description
Status of the last DMA transfer
Result[0]
Bit 1 set means transfer complete
Bit 2 set means DMA error
Bit 3 set means linked list error
Result[1]
DMA type: 0=MPEG, 1=OSD, 2=YUV
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SCHED_DMA_FROM_HOST
Enum 11/0x0B
Description
Setup DMA from host operation. Counterpart to API 0xCC
Param[0]
Memory address of link list
Param[1]
Total # of bytes to transfer
Param[2]
DMA type (0=MPEG, 1=OSD, 2=YUV)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_PAUSE_PLAYBACK
Enum 13/0x0D
Description
Freeze playback immediately. In this mode, when internal buffers are
full, no more data will be accepted and data request IRQs will be
masked.
Param[0]
Display: 0=last frame, 1=black
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_HALT_FW
Enum 14/0x0E
Description
The firmware is halted and no further API calls are serviced until
the firmware is uploaded again.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_STANDARD
Enum 16/0x10
Description
Selects display standard
Param[0]
0=NTSC, 1=PAL
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_GET_VERSION
Enum 17/0x11
Description
Returns decoder firmware version information
Result[0]
Version bitmask:
Bits 0:15 build
Bits 16:23 minor
Bits 24:31 major
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_STREAM_INPUT
Enum 20/0x14
Description
Select decoder stream input port
Param[0]
0=memory (default), 1=streaming
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_GET_TIMING_INFO
Enum 21/0x15
Description
Returns timing information from start of playback
Result[0]
Frame count by decode order
Result[1]
Video PTS bits 0:31 by display order
Result[2]
Video PTS bit 32 by display order
Result[3]
SCR bits 0:31 by display order
Result[4]
SCR bit 32 by display order
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_AUDIO_MODE
Enum 22/0x16
Description
Select audio mode
Param[0]
Dual mono mode action
Param[1]
Stereo mode action:
0=Stereo, 1=Left, 2=Right, 3=Mono, 4=Swap, -1=Unchanged
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_EVENT_NOTIFICATION
Enum 23/0x17
Description
Setup firmware to notify the host about a particular event.
Counterpart to API 0xD5
Param[0]
Event: 0=Audio mode change between stereo and dual channel
Param[1]
Notification 0=disabled, 1=enabled
Param[2]
Interrupt bit
Param[3]
Mailbox slot, -1 if no mailbox required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_DISPLAY_BUFFERS
Enum 24/0x18
Description
Number of display buffers. To decode all frames in reverse playback you
must use nine buffers.
Param[0]
0=six buffers, 1=nine buffers
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_EXTRACT_VBI
Enum 25/0x19
Description
Extracts VBI data
Param[0]
0=extract from extension & user data, 1=extract from private packets
Result[0]
VBI table location
Result[1]
VBI table size
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_DECODER_SOURCE
Enum 26/0x1A
Description
Selects decoder source. Ensure that the parameters passed to this
API match the encoder settings.
Param[0]
Mode: 0=MPEG from host, 1=YUV from encoder, 2=YUV from host
Param[1]
YUV picture width
Param[2]
YUV picture height
Param[3]
Bitmap: see Param[0] of API 0xBD
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_AUDIO_OUTPUT
Enum 27/0x1B
Description
Select audio output format
Param[0]
Bitmask:
0:1 Data size:
'00' 16 bit
'01' 20 bit
'10' 24 bit
2:7 Unused
8:9 Mode:
'00' 2 channels
'01' 4 channels
'10' 6 channels
'11' 6 channels with one line data mode
(for left justified MSB first mode, 20 bit only)
10:11 Unused
12:13 Channel format:
'00' right justified MSB first mode
'01' left justified MSB first mode
'10' I2S mode
14:15 Unused
16:21 Right justify bit count
22:31 Unused
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_AV_DELAY
Enum 28/0x1C
Description
Set audio/video delay in 90Khz ticks
Param[0]
0=A/V in sync, negative=audio lags, positive=video lags
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_PREBUFFERING
Enum 30/0x1E
Description
Decoder prebuffering, when enabled up to 128KB are buffered for
streams <8mpbs or 640KB for streams >8mbps
Param[0]
0=off, 1=on

94
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-dma.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
This page describes the structures and procedures used by the cx2341x DMA
engine.
Introduction
============
The cx2341x PCI interface is busmaster capable. This means it has a DMA
engine to efficiently transfer large volumes of data between the card and main
memory without requiring help from a CPU. Like most hardware, it must operate
on contiguous physical memory. This is difficult to come by in large quantities
on virtual memory machines.
Therefore, it also supports a technique called "scatter-gather". The card can
transfer multiple buffers in one operation. Instead of allocating one large
contiguous buffer, the driver can allocate several smaller buffers.
In practice, I've seen the average transfer to be roughly 80K, but transfers
above 128K were not uncommon, particularly at startup. The 128K figure is
important, because that is the largest block that the kernel can normally
allocate. Even still, 128K blocks are hard to come by, so the driver writer is
urged to choose a smaller block size and learn the scatter-gather technique.
Mailbox #10 is reserved for DMA transfer information.
Flow
====
This section describes, in general, the order of events when handling DMA
transfers. Detailed information follows this section.
- The card raises the Encoder interrupt.
- The driver reads the transfer type, offset and size from Mailbox #10.
- The driver constructs the scatter-gather array from enough free dma buffers
to cover the size.
- The driver schedules the DMA transfer via the ScheduleDMAtoHost API call.
- The card raises the DMA Complete interrupt.
- The driver checks the DMA status register for any errors.
- The driver post-processes the newly transferred buffers.
NOTE! It is possible that the Encoder and DMA Complete interrupts get raised
simultaneously. (End of the last, start of the next, etc.)
Mailbox #10
===========
The Flags, Command, Return Value and Timeout fields are ignored.
Name: Mailbox #10
Results[0]: Type: 0: MPEG.
Results[1]: Offset: The position relative to the card's memory space.
Results[2]: Size: The exact number of bytes to transfer.
My speculation is that since the StartCapture API has a capture type of "RAW"
available, that the type field will have other values that correspond to YUV
and PCM data.
Scatter-Gather Array
====================
The scatter-gather array is a contiguously allocated block of memory that
tells the card the source and destination of each data-block to transfer.
Card "addresses" are derived from the offset supplied by Mailbox #10. Host
addresses are the physical memory location of the target DMA buffer.
Each S-G array element is a struct of three 32-bit words. The first word is
the source address, the second is the destination address. Both take up the
entire 32 bits. The lowest 16 bits of the third word is the transfer byte
count. The high-bit of the third word is the "last" flag. The last-flag tells
the card to raise the DMA_DONE interrupt. From hard personal experience, if
you forget to set this bit, the card will still "work" but the stream will
most likely get corrupted.
The transfer count must be a multiple of 256. Therefore, the driver will need
to track how much data in the target buffer is valid and deal with it
accordingly.
Array Element:
- 32-bit Source Address
- 32-bit Destination Address
- 16-bit reserved (high bit is the last flag)
- 16-bit byte count
DMA Transfer Status
===================
Register 0x0004 holds the DMA Transfer Status:
Bit
4 Scatter-Gather array error
3 DMA write error
2 DMA read error
1 write completed
0 read completed

694
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,694 @@
Encoder firmware API description
================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_PING_FW
Enum 128/0x80
Description
Does nothing. Can be used to check if the firmware is responding.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_START_CAPTURE
Enum 129/0x81
Description
Commences the capture of video, audio and/or VBI data. All encoding
parameters must be initialized prior to this API call. Captures frames
continuously or until a predefined number of frames have been captured.
Param[0]
Capture stream type:
0=MPEG
1=Raw
2=Raw passthrough
3=VBI
Param[1]
Bitmask:
Bit 0 when set, captures YUV
Bit 1 when set, captures PCM audio
Bit 2 when set, captures VBI (same as param[0]=3)
Bit 3 when set, the capture destination is the decoder
(same as param[0]=2)
Bit 4 when set, the capture destination is the host
Note: this parameter is only meaningful for RAW capture type.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_STOP_CAPTURE
Enum 130/0x82
Description
Ends a capture in progress
Param[0]
0=stop at end of GOP (generates IRQ)
1=stop immediate (no IRQ)
Param[1]
Stream type to stop, see param[0] of API 0x81
Param[2]
Subtype, see param[1] of API 0x81
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_AUDIO_ID
Enum 137/0x89
Description
Assigns the transport stream ID of the encoded audio stream
Param[0]
Audio Stream ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_VIDEO_ID
Enum 139/0x8B
Description
Set video transport stream ID
Param[0]
Video stream ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_PCR_ID
Enum 141/0x8D
Description
Assigns the transport stream ID for PCR packets
Param[0]
PCR Stream ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_FRAME_RATE
Enum 143/0x8F
Description
Set video frames per second. Change occurs at start of new GOP.
Param[0]
0=30fps
1=25fps
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_FRAME_SIZE
Enum 145/0x91
Description
Select video stream encoding resolution.
Param[0]
Height in lines. Default 480
Param[1]
Width in pixels. Default 720
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_BIT_RATE
Enum 149/0x95
Description
Assign average video stream bitrate. Note on the last three params:
Param[3] and [4] seem to be always 0, param [5] doesn't seem to be used.
Param[0]
0=variable bitrate, 1=constant bitrate
Param[1]
bitrate in bits per second
Param[2]
peak bitrate in bits per second, divided by 400
Param[3]
Mux bitrate in bits per second, divided by 400. May be 0 (default).
Param[4]
Rate Control VBR Padding
Param[5]
VBV Buffer used by encoder
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_GOP_PROPERTIES
Enum 151/0x97
Description
Setup the GOP structure
Param[0]
GOP size (maximum is 34)
Param[1]
Number of B frames between the I and P frame, plus 1.
For example: IBBPBBPBBPBB --> GOP size: 12, number of B frames: 2+1 = 3
Note that GOP size must be a multiple of (B-frames + 1).
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_ASPECT_RATIO
Enum 153/0x99
Description
Sets the encoding aspect ratio. Changes in the aspect ratio take effect
at the start of the next GOP.
Param[0]
'0000' forbidden
'0001' 1:1 square
'0010' 4:3
'0011' 16:9
'0100' 2.21:1
'0101' reserved
....
'1111' reserved
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_DNR_FILTER_MODE
Enum 155/0x9B
Description
Assign Dynamic Noise Reduction operating mode
Param[0]
Bit0: Spatial filter, set=auto, clear=manual
Bit1: Temporal filter, set=auto, clear=manual
Param[1]
Median filter:
0=Disabled
1=Horizontal
2=Vertical
3=Horiz/Vert
4=Diagonal
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_DNR_FILTER_PROPS
Enum 157/0x9D
Description
These Dynamic Noise Reduction filter values are only meaningful when
the respective filter is set to "manual" (See API 0x9B)
Param[0]
Spatial filter: default 0, range 0:15
Param[1]
Temporal filter: default 0, range 0:31
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_CORING_LEVELS
Enum 159/0x9F
Description
Assign Dynamic Noise Reduction median filter properties.
Param[0]
Threshold above which the luminance median filter is enabled.
Default: 0, range 0:255
Param[1]
Threshold below which the luminance median filter is enabled.
Default: 255, range 0:255
Param[2]
Threshold above which the chrominance median filter is enabled.
Default: 0, range 0:255
Param[3]
Threshold below which the chrominance median filter is enabled.
Default: 255, range 0:255
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_SPATIAL_FILTER_TYPE
Enum 161/0xA1
Description
Assign spatial prefilter parameters
Param[0]
Luminance filter
0=Off
1=1D Horizontal
2=1D Vertical
3=2D H/V Separable (default)
4=2D Symmetric non-separable
Param[1]
Chrominance filter
0=Off
1=1D Horizontal (default)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_3_2_PULLDOWN
Enum 177/0xB1
Description
3:2 pulldown properties
Param[0]
0=enabled
1=disabled
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_VBI_LINE
Enum 183/0xB7
Description
Selects VBI line number.
Param[0]
Bits 0:4 line number
Bit 31 0=top_field, 1=bottom_field
Bits 0:31 all set specifies "all lines"
Param[1]
VBI line information features: 0=disabled, 1=enabled
Param[2]
Slicing: 0=None, 1=Closed Caption
Almost certainly not implemented. Set to 0.
Param[3]
Luminance samples in this line.
Almost certainly not implemented. Set to 0.
Param[4]
Chrominance samples in this line
Almost certainly not implemented. Set to 0.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_STREAM_TYPE
Enum 185/0xB9
Description
Assign stream type
Note: Transport stream is not working in recent firmwares.
And in older firmwares the timestamps in the TS seem to be
unreliable.
Param[0]
0=Program stream
1=Transport stream
2=MPEG1 stream
3=PES A/V stream
5=PES Video stream
7=PES Audio stream
10=DVD stream
11=VCD stream
12=SVCD stream
13=DVD_S1 stream
14=DVD_S2 stream
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_OUTPUT_PORT
Enum 187/0xBB
Description
Assign stream output port. Normally 0 when the data is copied through
the PCI bus (DMA), and 1 when the data is streamed to another chip
(pvrusb and cx88-blackbird).
Param[0]
0=Memory (default)
1=Streaming
2=Serial
Param[1]
Unknown, but leaving this to 0 seems to work best. Indications are that
this might have to do with USB support, although passing anything but 0
onl breaks things.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_AUDIO_PROPERTIES
Enum 189/0xBD
Description
Set audio stream properties, may be called while encoding is in progress.
Note: all bitfields are consistent with ISO11172 documentation except
bits 2:3 which ISO docs define as:
'11' Layer I
'10' Layer II
'01' Layer III
'00' Undefined
This discrepancy may indicate a possible error in the documentation.
Testing indicated that only Layer II is actually working, and that
the minimum bitrate should be 192 kbps.
Param[0]
Bitmask:
0:1 '00' 44.1Khz
'01' 48Khz
'10' 32Khz
'11' reserved
2:3 '01'=Layer I
'10'=Layer II
4:7 Bitrate:
Index | Layer I | Layer II
------+-------------+------------
'0000' | free format | free format
'0001' | 32 kbit/s | 32 kbit/s
'0010' | 64 kbit/s | 48 kbit/s
'0011' | 96 kbit/s | 56 kbit/s
'0100' | 128 kbit/s | 64 kbit/s
'0101' | 160 kbit/s | 80 kbit/s
'0110' | 192 kbit/s | 96 kbit/s
'0111' | 224 kbit/s | 112 kbit/s
'1000' | 256 kbit/s | 128 kbit/s
'1001' | 288 kbit/s | 160 kbit/s
'1010' | 320 kbit/s | 192 kbit/s
'1011' | 352 kbit/s | 224 kbit/s
'1100' | 384 kbit/s | 256 kbit/s
'1101' | 416 kbit/s | 320 kbit/s
'1110' | 448 kbit/s | 384 kbit/s
Note: For Layer II, not all combinations of total bitrate
and mode are allowed. See ISO11172-3 3-Annex B, Table 3-B.2
8:9 '00'=Stereo
'01'=JointStereo
'10'=Dual
'11'=Mono
Note: testing seems to indicate that Mono and possibly
JointStereo are not working (default to stereo).
Dual does work, though.
10:11 Mode Extension used in joint_stereo mode.
In Layer I and II they indicate which subbands are in
intensity_stereo. All other subbands are coded in stereo.
'00' subbands 4-31 in intensity_stereo, bound==4
'01' subbands 8-31 in intensity_stereo, bound==8
'10' subbands 12-31 in intensity_stereo, bound==12
'11' subbands 16-31 in intensity_stereo, bound==16
12:13 Emphasis:
'00' None
'01' 50/15uS
'10' reserved
'11' CCITT J.17
14 CRC:
'0' off
'1' on
15 Copyright:
'0' off
'1' on
16 Generation:
'0' copy
'1' original
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_HALT_FW
Enum 195/0xC3
Description
The firmware is halted and no further API calls are serviced until the
firmware is uploaded again.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_GET_VERSION
Enum 196/0xC4
Description
Returns the version of the encoder firmware.
Result[0]
Version bitmask:
Bits 0:15 build
Bits 16:23 minor
Bits 24:31 major
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_GOP_CLOSURE
Enum 197/0xC5
Description
Assigns the GOP open/close property.
Param[0]
0=Open
1=Closed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_GET_SEQ_END
Enum 198/0xC6
Description
Obtains the sequence end code of the encoder's buffer. When a capture
is started a number of interrupts are still generated, the last of
which will have Result[0] set to 1 and Result[1] will contain the size
of the buffer.
Result[0]
State of the transfer (1 if last buffer)
Result[1]
If Result[0] is 1, this contains the size of the last buffer, undefined
otherwise.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_PGM_INDEX_INFO
Enum 199/0xC7
Description
Sets the Program Index Information.
Param[0]
Picture Mask:
0=No index capture
1=I frames
3=I,P frames
7=I,P,B frames
Param[1]
Elements requested (up to 400)
Result[0]
Offset in SDF memory of the table.
Result[1]
Number of allocated elements up to a maximum of Param[1]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_VBI_CONFIG
Enum 200/0xC8
Description
Configure VBI settings
Param[0]
Bitmap:
0 Mode '0' Sliced, '1' Raw
1:3 Insertion:
'000' insert in extension & user data
'001' insert in private packets
'010' separate stream and user data
'111' separate stream and private data
8:15 Stream ID (normally 0xBD)
Param[1]
Frames per interrupt (max 8). Only valid in raw mode.
Param[2]
Total raw VBI frames. Only valid in raw mode.
Param[3]
Start codes
Param[4]
Stop codes
Param[5]
Lines per frame
Param[6]
Byte per line
Result[0]
Observed frames per interrupt in raw mode only. Rage 1 to Param[1]
Result[1]
Observed number of frames in raw mode. Range 1 to Param[2]
Result[2]
Memory offset to start or raw VBI data
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_DMA_BLOCK_SIZE
Enum 201/0xC9
Description
Set DMA transfer block size
Param[0]
DMA transfer block size in bytes or frames. When unit is bytes,
supported block sizes are 2^7, 2^8 and 2^9 bytes.
Param[1]
Unit: 0=bytes, 1=frames
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_GET_PREV_DMA_INFO_MB_10
Enum 202/0xCA
Description
Returns information on the previous DMA transfer in conjunction with
bit 27 of the interrupt mask. Uses mailbox 10.
Result[0]
Type of stream
Result[1]
Address Offset
Result[2]
Maximum size of transfer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_GET_PREV_DMA_INFO_MB_9
Enum 203/0xCB
Description
Returns information on the previous DMA transfer in conjunction with
bit 27 of the interrupt mask. Uses mailbox 9.
Result[0]
Status bits:
Bit 0 set indicates transfer complete
Bit 2 set indicates transfer error
Bit 4 set indicates linked list error
Result[1]
DMA type
Result[2]
Presentation Time Stamp bits 0..31
Result[3]
Presentation Time Stamp bit 32
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SCHED_DMA_TO_HOST
Enum 204/0xCC
Description
Setup DMA to host operation
Param[0]
Memory address of link list
Param[1]
Length of link list (wtf: what units ???)
Param[2]
DMA type (0=MPEG)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_INITIALIZE_INPUT
Enum 205/0xCD
Description
Initializes the video input
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_FRAME_DROP_RATE
Enum 208/0xD0
Description
For each frame captured, skip specified number of frames.
Param[0]
Number of frames to skip
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_PAUSE_ENCODER
Enum 210/0xD2
Description
During a pause condition, all frames are dropped instead of being encoded.
Param[0]
0=Pause encoding
1=Continue encoding
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_REFRESH_INPUT
Enum 211/0xD3
Description
Refreshes the video input
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_COPYRIGHT
Enum 212/0xD4
Description
Sets stream copyright property
Param[0]
0=Stream is not copyrighted
1=Stream is copyrighted
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_EVENT_NOTIFICATION
Enum 213/0xD5
Description
Setup firmware to notify the host about a particular event. Host must
unmask the interrupt bit.
Param[0]
Event (0=refresh encoder input)
Param[1]
Notification 0=disabled 1=enabled
Param[2]
Interrupt bit
Param[3]
Mailbox slot, -1 if no mailbox required.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_NUM_VSYNC_LINES
Enum 214/0xD6
Description
Depending on the analog video decoder used, this assigns the number
of lines for field 1 and 2.
Param[0]
Field 1 number of lines:
0x00EF for SAA7114
0x00F0 for SAA7115
0x0105 for Micronas
Param[1]
Field 2 number of lines:
0x00EF for SAA7114
0x00F0 for SAA7115
0x0106 for Micronas
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_PLACEHOLDER
Enum 215/0xD7
Description
Provides a mechanism of inserting custom user data in the MPEG stream.
Param[0]
0=extension & user data
1=private packet with stream ID 0xBD
Param[1]
Rate at which to insert data, in units of frames (for private packet)
or GOPs (for ext. & user data)
Param[2]
Number of data DWORDs (below) to insert
Param[3]
Custom data 0
Param[4]
Custom data 1
Param[5]
Custom data 2
Param[6]
Custom data 3
Param[7]
Custom data 4
Param[8]
Custom data 5
Param[9]
Custom data 6
Param[10]
Custom data 7
Param[11]
Custom data 8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_MUTE_VIDEO
Enum 217/0xD9
Description
Video muting
Param[0]
Bit usage:
0 '0'=video not muted
'1'=video muted, creates frames with the YUV color defined below
1:7 Unused
8:15 V chrominance information
16:23 U chrominance information
24:31 Y luminance information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_MUTE_AUDIO
Enum 218/0xDA
Description
Audio muting
Param[0]
0=audio not muted
1=audio muted (produces silent mpeg audio stream)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_UNKNOWN
Enum 219/0xDB
Description
Unknown API, it's used by Hauppauge though.
Param[0]
0 This is the value Hauppauge uses, Unknown what it means.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_MISC
Enum 220/0xDC
Description
Miscellaneous actions. Not known for 100% what it does. It's really a
sort of ioctl call. The first parameter is a command number, the second
the value.
Param[0]
Command number:
1=set initial SCR value when starting encoding.
2=set quality mode (apparently some test setting).
3=setup advanced VIM protection handling (supposedly only for the cx23416
for raw YUV).
Actually it looks like this should be 0 for saa7114/5 based card and 1
for cx25840 based cards.
4=generate artificial PTS timestamps
5=USB flush mode
6=something to do with the quantization matrix
7=set navigation pack insertion for DVD
8=enable scene change detection (seems to be a failure)
9=set history parameters of the video input module
10=set input field order of VIM
11=set quantization matrix
12=reset audio interface
13=set audio volume delay
14=set audio delay
Param[1]
Command value.

141
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-memory.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
This document describes the cx2341x memory map and documents some of the register
space.
Warning! This information was figured out from searching through the memory and
registers, this information may not be correct and is certainly not complete, and
was not derived from anything more than searching through the memory space with
commands like:
ivtvctl -O min=0x02000000,max=0x020000ff
So take this as is, I'm always searching for more stuff, it's a large
register space :-).
Memory Map
==========
The cx2341x exposes its entire 64M memory space to the PCI host via the PCI BAR0
(Base Address Register 0). The addresses here are offsets relative to the
address held in BAR0.
0x00000000-0x00ffffff Encoder memory space
0x00000000-0x0003ffff Encode.rom
???-??? MPEG buffer(s)
???-??? Raw video capture buffer(s)
???-??? Raw audio capture buffer(s)
???-??? Display buffers (6 or 9)
0x01000000-0x01ffffff Decoder memory space
0x01000000-0x0103ffff Decode.rom
???-??? MPEG buffers(s)
0x0114b000-0x0115afff Audio.rom (deprecated?)
0x02000000-0x0200ffff Register Space
Registers
=========
The registers occupy the 64k space starting at the 0x02000000 offset from BAR0.
All of these registers are 32 bits wide.
DMA Registers 0x000-0xff:
0x00 - Control:
0=reset/cancel, 1=read, 2=write, 4=stop
0x04 - DMA status:
1=read busy, 2=write busy, 4=read error, 8=write error, 16=link list error
0x08 - pci DMA pointer for read link list
0x0c - pci DMA pointer for write link list
0x10 - read/write DMA enable:
1=read enable, 2=write enable
0x14 - always 0xffffffff, if set any lower instability occurs, 0x00 crashes
0x18 - ??
0x1c - always 0x20 or 32, smaller values slow down DMA transactions
0x20 - always value of 0x780a010a
0x24-0x3c - usually just random values???
0x40 - Interrupt status
0x44 - Write a bit here and shows up in Interrupt status 0x40
0x48 - Interrupt Mask
0x4C - always value of 0xfffdffff,
if changed to 0xffffffff DMA write interrupts break.
0x50 - always 0xffffffff
0x54 - always 0xffffffff (0x4c, 0x50, 0x54 seem like interrupt masks, are
3 processors on chip, Java ones, VPU, SPU, APU, maybe these are the
interrupt masks???).
0x60-0x7C - random values
0x80 - first write linked list reg, for Encoder Memory addr
0x84 - first write linked list reg, for pci memory addr
0x88 - first write linked list reg, for length of buffer in memory addr
(|0x80000000 or this for last link)
0x8c-0xcc - rest of write linked list reg, 8 sets of 3 total, DMA goes here
from linked list addr in reg 0x0c, firmware must push through or
something.
0xe0 - first (and only) read linked list reg, for pci memory addr
0xe4 - first (and only) read linked list reg, for Decoder memory addr
0xe8 - first (and only) read linked list reg, for length of buffer
0xec-0xff - Nothing seems to be in these registers, 0xec-f4 are 0x00000000.
Memory locations for Encoder Buffers 0x700-0x7ff:
These registers show offsets of memory locations pertaining to each
buffer area used for encoding, have to shift them by <<1 first.
0x07F8: Encoder SDRAM refresh
0x07FC: Encoder SDRAM pre-charge
Memory locations for Decoder Buffers 0x800-0x8ff:
These registers show offsets of memory locations pertaining to each
buffer area used for decoding, have to shift them by <<1 first.
0x08F8: Decoder SDRAM refresh
0x08FC: Decoder SDRAM pre-charge
Other memory locations:
0x2800: Video Display Module control
0x2D00: AO (audio output?) control
0x2D24: Bytes Flushed
0x7000: LSB I2C write clock bit (inverted)
0x7004: LSB I2C write data bit (inverted)
0x7008: LSB I2C read clock bit
0x700c: LSB I2C read data bit
0x9008: GPIO get input state
0x900c: GPIO set output state
0x9020: GPIO direction (Bit7 (GPIO 0..7) - 0:input, 1:output)
0x9050: SPU control
0x9054: Reset HW blocks
0x9058: VPU control
0xA018: Bit6: interrupt pending?
0xA064: APU command
Interrupt Status Register
=========================
The definition of the bits in the interrupt status register 0x0040, and the
interrupt mask 0x0048. If a bit is cleared in the mask, then we want our ISR to
execute.
Bit
31 Encoder Start Capture
30 Encoder EOS
29 Encoder VBI capture
28 Encoder Video Input Module reset event
27 Encoder DMA complete
26
25 Decoder copy protect detection event
24 Decoder audio mode change detection event
23
22 Decoder data request
21 Decoder I-Frame? done
20 Decoder DMA complete
19 Decoder VBI re-insertion
18 Decoder DMA err (linked-list bad)
Missing
Encoder API call completed
Decoder API call completed
Encoder API post(?)
Decoder API post(?)
Decoder VTRACE event

342
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-osd-api.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,342 @@
OSD firmware API description
============================
Note: this API is part of the decoder firmware, so it's cx23415 only.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_FRAMEBUFFER
Enum 65/0x41
Description
Return base and length of contiguous OSD memory.
Result[0]
OSD base address
Result[1]
OSD length
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_PIXEL_FORMAT
Enum 66/0x42
Description
Query OSD format
Result[0]
0=8bit index, 4=AlphaRGB 8:8:8:8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_PIXEL_FORMAT
Enum 67/0x43
Description
Assign pixel format
Param[0]
0=8bit index, 4=AlphaRGB 8:8:8:8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_STATE
Enum 68/0x44
Description
Query OSD state
Result[0]
Bit 0 0=off, 1=on
Bits 1:2 alpha control
Bits 3:5 pixel format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_STATE
Enum 69/0x45
Description
OSD switch
Param[0]
0=off, 1=on
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_OSD_COORDS
Enum 70/0x46
Description
Retrieve coordinates of OSD area blended with video
Result[0]
OSD buffer address
Result[1]
Stride in pixels
Result[2]
Lines in OSD buffer
Result[3]
Horizontal offset in buffer
Result[4]
Vertical offset in buffer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_OSD_COORDS
Enum 71/0x47
Description
Assign the coordinates of the OSD area to blend with video
Param[0]
buffer address
Param[1]
buffer stride in pixels
Param[2]
lines in buffer
Param[3]
horizontal offset
Param[4]
vertical offset
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_SCREEN_COORDS
Enum 72/0x48
Description
Retrieve OSD screen area coordinates
Result[0]
top left horizontal offset
Result[1]
top left vertical offset
Result[2]
bottom right hotizontal offset
Result[3]
bottom right vertical offset
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_SCREEN_COORDS
Enum 73/0x49
Description
Assign the coordinates of the screen area to blend with video
Param[0]
top left horizontal offset
Param[1]
top left vertical offset
Param[2]
bottom left horizontal offset
Param[3]
bottom left vertical offset
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_GLOBAL_ALPHA
Enum 74/0x4A
Description
Retrieve OSD global alpha
Result[0]
global alpha: 0=off, 1=on
Result[1]
bits 0:7 global alpha
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_GLOBAL_ALPHA
Enum 75/0x4B
Description
Update global alpha
Param[0]
global alpha: 0=off, 1=on
Param[1]
global alpha (8 bits)
Param[2]
local alpha: 0=on, 1=off
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_BLEND_COORDS
Enum 78/0x4C
Description
Move start of blending area within display buffer
Param[0]
horizontal offset in buffer
Param[1]
vertical offset in buffer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_FLICKER_STATE
Enum 79/0x4F
Description
Retrieve flicker reduction module state
Result[0]
flicker state: 0=off, 1=on
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_FLICKER_STATE
Enum 80/0x50
Description
Set flicker reduction module state
Param[0]
State: 0=off, 1=on
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_BLT_COPY
Enum 82/0x52
Description
BLT copy
Param[0]
'0000' zero
'0001' ~destination AND ~source
'0010' ~destination AND source
'0011' ~destination
'0100' destination AND ~source
'0101' ~source
'0110' destination XOR source
'0111' ~destination OR ~source
'1000' ~destination AND ~source
'1001' destination XNOR source
'1010' source
'1011' ~destination OR source
'1100' destination
'1101' destination OR ~source
'1110' destination OR source
'1111' one
Param[1]
Resulting alpha blending
'01' source_alpha
'10' destination_alpha
'11' source_alpha*destination_alpha+1
(zero if both source and destination alpha are zero)
Param[2]
'00' output_pixel = source_pixel
'01' if source_alpha=0:
output_pixel = destination_pixel
if 256 > source_alpha > 1:
output_pixel = ((source_alpha + 1)*source_pixel +
(255 - source_alpha)*destination_pixel)/256
'10' if destination_alpha=0:
output_pixel = source_pixel
if 255 > destination_alpha > 0:
output_pixel = ((255 - destination_alpha)*source_pixel +
(destination_alpha + 1)*destination_pixel)/256
'11' if source_alpha=0:
source_temp = 0
if source_alpha=255:
source_temp = source_pixel*256
if 255 > source_alpha > 0:
source_temp = source_pixel*(source_alpha + 1)
if destination_alpha=0:
destination_temp = 0
if destination_alpha=255:
destination_temp = destination_pixel*256
if 255 > destination_alpha > 0:
destination_temp = destination_pixel*(destination_alpha + 1)
output_pixel = (source_temp + destination_temp)/256
Param[3]
width
Param[4]
height
Param[5]
destination pixel mask
Param[6]
destination rectangle start address
Param[7]
destination stride in dwords
Param[8]
source stride in dwords
Param[9]
source rectangle start address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_BLT_FILL
Enum 83/0x53
Description
BLT fill color
Param[0]
Same as Param[0] on API 0x52
Param[1]
Same as Param[1] on API 0x52
Param[2]
Same as Param[2] on API 0x52
Param[3]
width
Param[4]
height
Param[5]
destination pixel mask
Param[6]
destination rectangle start address
Param[7]
destination stride in dwords
Param[8]
color fill value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_BLT_TEXT
Enum 84/0x54
Description
BLT for 8 bit alpha text source
Param[0]
Same as Param[0] on API 0x52
Param[1]
Same as Param[1] on API 0x52
Param[2]
Same as Param[2] on API 0x52
Param[3]
width
Param[4]
height
Param[5]
destination pixel mask
Param[6]
destination rectangle start address
Param[7]
destination stride in dwords
Param[8]
source stride in dwords
Param[9]
source rectangle start address
Param[10]
color fill value
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_FRAMEBUFFER_WINDOW
Enum 86/0x56
Description
Positions the main output window on the screen. The coordinates must be
such that the entire window fits on the screen.
Param[0]
window width
Param[1]
window height
Param[2]
top left window corner horizontal offset
Param[3]
top left window corner vertical offset
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_CHROMA_KEY
Enum 96/0x60
Description
Chroma key switch and color
Param[0]
state: 0=off, 1=on
Param[1]
color
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_GET_ALPHA_CONTENT_INDEX
Enum 97/0x61
Description
Retrieve alpha content index
Result[0]
alpha content index, Range 0:15
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_OSD_SET_ALPHA_CONTENT_INDEX
Enum 98/0x62
Description
Assign alpha content index
Param[0]
alpha content index, range 0:15

49
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-upload.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
This document describes how to upload the cx2341x firmware to the card.
How to find
===========
See the web pages of the various projects that uses this chip for information
on how to obtain the firmware.
The firmware stored in a Windows driver can be detected as follows:
- Each firmware image is 256k bytes.
- The 1st 32-bit word of the Encoder image is 0x0000da7
- The 1st 32-bit word of the Decoder image is 0x00003a7
- The 2nd 32-bit word of both images is 0xaa55bb66
How to load
===========
- Issue the FWapi command to stop the encoder if it is running. Wait for the
command to complete.
- Issue the FWapi command to stop the decoder if it is running. Wait for the
command to complete.
- Issue the I2C command to the digitizer to stop emitting VSYNC events.
- Issue the FWapi command to halt the encoder's firmware.
- Sleep for 10ms.
- Issue the FWapi command to halt the decoder's firmware.
- Sleep for 10ms.
- Write 0x00000000 to register 0x2800 to stop the Video Display Module.
- Write 0x00000005 to register 0x2D00 to stop the AO (audio output?).
- Write 0x00000000 to register 0xA064 to ping? the APU.
- Write 0xFFFFFFFE to register 0x9058 to stop the VPU.
- Write 0xFFFFFFFF to register 0x9054 to reset the HW blocks.
- Write 0x00000001 to register 0x9050 to stop the SPU.
- Sleep for 10ms.
- Write 0x0000001A to register 0x07FC to init the Encoder SDRAM's pre-charge.
- Write 0x80000640 to register 0x07F8 to init the Encoder SDRAM's refresh to 1us.
- Write 0x0000001A to register 0x08FC to init the Decoder SDRAM's pre-charge.
- Write 0x80000640 to register 0x08F8 to init the Decoder SDRAM's refresh to 1us.
- Sleep for 512ms. (600ms is recommended)
- Transfer the encoder's firmware image to offset 0 in Encoder memory space.
- Transfer the decoder's firmware image to offset 0 in Decoder memory space.
- Use a read-modify-write operation to Clear bit 0 of register 0x9050 to
re-enable the SPU.
- Sleep for 1 second.
- Use a read-modify-write operation to Clear bits 3 and 0 of register 0x9058
to re-enable the VPU.
- Sleep for 1 second.
- Issue status API commands to both firmware images to verify.

54
Documentation/video4linux/cx88/hauppauge-wintv-cx88-ir.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
The controls for the mux are GPIO [0,1] for source, and GPIO 2 for muting.
GPIO0 GPIO1
0 0 TV Audio
1 0 FM radio
0 1 Line-In
1 1 Mono tuner bypass or CD passthru (tuner specific)
GPIO 16(i believe) is tied to the IR port (if present).
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
>From the data sheet:
Register 24'h20004 PCI Interrupt Status
bit [18] IR_SMP_INT Set when 32 input samples have been collected over
gpio[16] pin into GP_SAMPLE register.
What's missing from the data sheet:
Setup 4KHz sampling rate (roughly 2x oversampled; good enough for our RC5
compat remote)
set register 0x35C050 to 0xa80a80
enable sampling
set register 0x35C054 to 0x5
Of course, enable the IRQ bit 18 in the interrupt mask register .(and
provide for a handler)
GP_SAMPLE register is at 0x35C058
Bits are then right shifted into the GP_SAMPLE register at the specified
rate; you get an interrupt when a full DWORD is recieved.
You need to recover the actual RC5 bits out of the (oversampled) IR sensor
bits. (Hint: look for the 0/1and 1/0 crossings of the RC5 bi-phase data) An
actual raw RC5 code will span 2-3 DWORDS, depending on the actual alignment.
I'm pretty sure when no IR signal is present the receiver is always in a
marking state(1); but stray light, etc can cause intermittent noise values
as well. Remember, this is a free running sample of the IR receiver state
over time, so don't assume any sample starts at any particular place.
http://www.atmel.com/dyn/resources/prod_documents/doc2817.pdf
This data sheet (google search) seems to have a lovely description of the
RC5 basics
http://users.pandora.be/nenya/electronics/rc5/ and more data
http://www.ee.washington.edu/circuit_archive/text/ir_decode.txt
and even a reference to how to decode a bi-phase data stream.
http://www.xs4all.nl/~sbp/knowledge/ir/rc5.htm
still more info

192
Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */
/*
* Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program
*
* Compile with:
* gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab
* Use as:
* v4lgrab >image.ppm
*
* Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org>
* Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c
* with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu).
*
*/
#include <unistd.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <linux/types.h>
#include <linux/videodev.h>
#define FILE "/dev/video0"
/* Stole this from tvset.c */
#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b) \
{ \
switch (format) \
{ \
case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY: \
switch (depth) \
{ \
case 4: \
case 6: \
case 8: \
(r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\
break; \
\
case 16: \
(r) = (g) = (b) = \
*((unsigned short *) buf); \
buf += 2; \
break; \
} \
break; \
\
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565: \
{ \
unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf; \
(r) = tmp&0xF800; \
(g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00; \
(b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800; \
buf += 2; \
} \
break; \
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555: \
(r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8; \
(g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8; \
(b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8; \
buf += 2; \
break; \
\
case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24: \
(r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8; \
(b) = buf[2] << 8; \
buf += 3; \
break; \
\
default: \
fprintf(stderr, \
"Format %d not yet supported\n", \
format); \
} \
}
int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) {
long i, tot = 0;
for (i=0;i<size*3;i++)
tot += image[i];
*brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3;
return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130);
}
int main(int argc, char ** argv)
{
int fd = open(FILE, O_RDONLY), f;
struct video_capability cap;
struct video_window win;
struct video_picture vpic;
unsigned char *buffer, *src;
int bpp = 24, r, g, b;
unsigned int i, src_depth;
if (fd < 0) {
perror(FILE);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOGCAP");
fprintf(stderr, "(" FILE " not a video4linux device?)\n");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOCGWIN");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
perror("VIDIOCGPICT");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) {
vpic.depth=8;
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY; /* 8bit grey */
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.depth=6;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.depth=4;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
close(fd);
exit(1);
}
}
}
} else {
vpic.depth=24;
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) {
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565;
vpic.depth=16;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555;
vpic.depth=15;
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n");
return -1;
}
}
}
}
buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp);
if (!buffer) {
fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n");
exit(1);
}
do {
int newbright;
read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp);
f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright);
if (f) {
vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8);
if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) {
perror("VIDIOSPICT");
break;
}
}
} while (f);
fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height);
src = buffer;
for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) {
READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b);
fputc(r>>8, stdout);
fputc(g>>8, stdout);
fputc(b>>8, stdout);
}
close(fd);
return 0;
}

32
Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt
View File

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
ZC0301 Image Processor and Control Chip
ZC0301 and ZC0301P Image Processor and Control Chip
Driver for Linux
=======================================
===================================================
- Documentation -
@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
4. Overview and features
========================
This driver supports the video interface of the devices mounting the ZC0301
Image Processor and Control Chip.
This driver supports the video interface of the devices mounting the ZC0301 or
ZC0301P Image Processors and Control Chips.
The driver relies on the Video4Linux2 and USB core modules. It has been
designed to run properly on SMP systems as well.
The latest version of the ZC0301 driver can be found at the following URL:
The latest version of the ZC0301[P] driver can be found at the following URL:
http://www.linux-projects.org/
Some of the features of the driver are:
@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ supported by the USB Audio driver thanks to the ALSA API:
And finally:
# USB Multimedia devices
# V4L USB devices
#
CONFIG_USB_ZC0301=m
@ -204,11 +204,25 @@ Vendor ID Product ID
0x041e 0x4017
0x041e 0x401c
0x041e 0x401e
0x041e 0x401f
0x041e 0x4022
0x041e 0x4034
0x041e 0x4035
0x041e 0x4036
0x041e 0x403a
0x0458 0x7007
0x0458 0x700C
0x0458 0x700f
0x046d 0x08ae
0x055f 0xd003
0x055f 0xd004
0x046d 0x08ae
0x0ac8 0x0301
0x0ac8 0x301b
0x0ac8 0x303b
0x10fd 0x0128
0x10fd 0x8050
0x10fd 0x804e
The list above does not imply that all those devices work with this driver: up
until now only the ones that mount the following image sensors are supported;
@ -217,6 +231,7 @@ kernel messages will always tell you whether this is the case:
Model Manufacturer
----- ------------
PAS202BCB PixArt Imaging, Inc.
PB-0330 Photobit Corporation
9. Notes for V4L2 application developers
@ -250,5 +265,6 @@ the fingerprint is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958 5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'.
been taken from the documentation of the ZC030x Video4Linux1 driver written
by Andrew Birkett <andy@nobugs.org>;
- The initialization values of the ZC0301 controller connected to the PAS202BCB
image sensor have been taken from the SPCA5XX driver maintained by
Michel Xhaard <mxhaard@magic.fr>.
and PB-0330 image sensors have been taken from the SPCA5XX driver maintained
by Michel Xhaard <mxhaard@magic.fr>;
- Stanislav Lechev donated one camera.

114
Documentation/vm/page_migration
View File

@ -26,8 +26,13 @@ a process are located. See also the numa_maps manpage in the numactl package.
Manual migration is useful if for example the scheduler has relocated
a process to a processor on a distant node. A batch scheduler or an
administrator may detect the situation and move the pages of the process
nearer to the new processor. At some point in the future we may have
some mechanism in the scheduler that will automatically move the pages.
nearer to the new processor. The kernel itself does only provide
manual page migration support. Automatic page migration may be implemented
through user space processes that move pages. A special function call
"move_pages" allows the moving of individual pages within a process.
A NUMA profiler may f.e. obtain a log showing frequent off node
accesses and may use the result to move pages to more advantageous
locations.
Larger installations usually partition the system using cpusets into
sections of nodes. Paul Jackson has equipped cpusets with the ability to
@ -62,22 +67,14 @@ A. In kernel use of migrate_pages()
It also prevents the swapper or other scans to encounter
the page.
2. Generate a list of newly allocates page. These pages will contain the
contents of the pages from the first list after page migration is
complete.
2. We need to have a function of type new_page_t that can be
passed to migrate_pages(). This function should figure out
how to allocate the correct new page given the old page.
3. The migrate_pages() function is called which attempts
to do the migration. It returns the moved pages in the
list specified as the third parameter and the failed
migrations in the fourth parameter. The first parameter
will contain the pages that could still be retried.
4. The leftover pages of various types are returned
to the LRU using putback_to_lru_pages() or otherwise
disposed of. The pages will still have the refcount as
increased by isolate_lru_pages() if putback_to_lru_pages() is not
used! The kernel may want to handle the various cases of failures in
different ways.
to do the migration. It will call the function to allocate
the new page for each page that is considered for
moving.
B. How migrate_pages() works
----------------------------
@ -93,83 +90,58 @@ Steps:
2. Insure that writeback is complete.
3. Make sure that the page has assigned swap cache entry if
it is an anonyous page. The swap cache reference is necessary
to preserve the information contain in the page table maps while
page migration occurs.
4. Prep the new page that we want to move to. It is locked
3. Prep the new page that we want to move to. It is locked
and set to not being uptodate so that all accesses to the new
page immediately lock while the move is in progress.
5. All the page table references to the page are either dropped (file
backed pages) or converted to swap references (anonymous pages).
This should decrease the reference count.
4. The new page is prepped with some settings from the old page so that
accesses to the new page will discover a page with the correct settings.
5. All the page table references to the page are converted
to migration entries or dropped (nonlinear vmas).
This decrease the mapcount of a page. If the resulting
mapcount is not zero then we do not migrate the page.
All user space processes that attempt to access the page
will now wait on the page lock.
6. The radix tree lock is taken. This will cause all processes trying
to reestablish a pte to block on the radix tree spinlock.
to access the page via the mapping to block on the radix tree spinlock.
7. The refcount of the page is examined and we back out if references remain
otherwise we know that we are the only one referencing this page.
8. The radix tree is checked and if it does not contain the pointer to this
page then we back out because someone else modified the mapping first.
page then we back out because someone else modified the radix tree.
9. The mapping is checked. If the mapping is gone then a truncate action may
be in progress and we back out.
9. The radix tree is changed to point to the new page.
10. The new page is prepped with some settings from the old page so that
accesses to the new page will be discovered to have the correct settings.
10. The reference count of the old page is dropped because the radix tree
reference is gone. A reference to the new page is established because
the new page is referenced to by the radix tree.
11. The radix tree is changed to point to the new page.
11. The radix tree lock is dropped. With that lookups in the mapping
become possible again. Processes will move from spinning on the tree_lock
to sleeping on the locked new page.
12. The reference count of the old page is dropped because the radix tree
reference is gone.
12. The page contents are copied to the new page.
13. The radix tree lock is dropped. With that lookups become possible again
and other processes will move from spinning on the tree lock to sleeping on
the locked new page.
13. The remaining page flags are copied to the new page.
14. The page contents are copied to the new page.
14. The old page flags are cleared to indicate that the page does
not provide any information anymore.
15. The remaining page flags are copied to the new page.
15. Queued up writeback on the new page is triggered.
16. The old page flags are cleared to indicate that the page does
not use any information anymore.
17. Queued up writeback on the new page is triggered.
18. If swap pte's were generated for the page then replace them with real
ptes. This will reenable access for processes not blocked by the page lock.
16. If migration entries were page then replace them with real ptes. Doing
so will enable access for user space processes not already waiting for
the page lock.
19. The page locks are dropped from the old and new page.
Processes waiting on the page lock can continue.
Processes waiting on the page lock will redo their page faults
and will reach the new page.
20. The new page is moved to the LRU and can be scanned by the swapper
etc again.
TODO list
---------
- Page migration requires the use of swap handles to preserve the
information of the anonymous page table entries. This means that swap
space is reserved but never used. The maximum number of swap handles used
is determined by CHUNK_SIZE (see mm/mempolicy.c) per ongoing migration.
Reservation of pages could be avoided by having a special type of swap
handle that does not require swap space and that would only track the page
references. Something like that was proposed by Marcelo Tosatti in the
past (search for migration cache on lkml or linux-mm@kvack.org).
- Page migration unmaps ptes for file backed pages and requires page
faults to reestablish these ptes. This could be optimized by somehow
recording the references before migration and then reestablish them later.
However, there are several locking challenges that have to be overcome
before this is possible.
- Page migration generates read ptes for anonymous pages. Dirty page
faults are required to make the pages writable again. It may be possible
to generate a pte marked dirty if it is known that the page is dirty and
that this process has the only reference to that page.
Christoph Lameter, March 8, 2006.
Christoph Lameter, May 8, 2006.

18
Documentation/w1/masters/ds2490 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
Kernel driver ds2490
====================
Supported chips:
* Maxim DS2490 based
Author: Evgeniy Polyakov <johnpol@2ka.mipt.ru>
Description
-----------
The Maixm/Dallas Semiconductor DS2490 is a chip
which allows to build USB <-> W1 bridges.
DS9490(R) is a USB <-> W1 bus master device
which has 0x81 family ID integrated chip and DS2490
low-level operational chip.

18
Documentation/w1/w1.generic
View File

@ -27,8 +27,19 @@ When a w1 master driver registers with the w1 subsystem, the following occurs:
When a device is found on the bus, w1 core checks if driver for it's family is
loaded. If so, the family driver is attached to the slave.
If there is no driver for the family, a simple sysfs entry is created
for the slave device.
If there is no driver for the family, default one is assigned, which allows to perform
almost any kind of operations. Each logical operation is a transaction
in nature, which can contain several (two or one) low-level operations.
Let's see how one can read EEPROM context:
1. one must write control buffer, i.e. buffer containing command byte
and two byte address. At this step bus is reset and appropriate device
is selected using either W1_SKIP_ROM or W1_MATCH_ROM command.
Then provided control buffer is being written to the wire.
2. reading. This will issue reading eeprom response.
It is possible that between 1. and 2. w1 master thread will reset bus for searching
and slave device will be even removed, but in this case 0xff will
be read, since no device was selected.
W1 device families
@ -89,4 +100,5 @@ driver - (standard) symlink to the w1 driver
name - the device name, usually the same as the directory name
w1_slave - (optional) a binary file whose meaning depends on the
family driver
rw - (optional) created for slave devices which do not have
appropriate family driver. Allows to read/write binary data.

98
Documentation/w1/w1.netlink Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
Userspace communication protocol over connector [1].
Message types.
=============
There are three types of messages between w1 core and userspace:
1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device found
either due to automatic or requested search.
2. Userspace commands. Includes read/write and search/alarm search comamnds.
3. Replies to userspace commands.
Protocol.
========
[struct cn_msg] - connector header. It's length field is equal to size of the attached data.
[struct w1_netlink_msg] - w1 netlink header.
__u8 type - message type.
W1_SLAVE_ADD/W1_SLAVE_REMOVE - slave add/remove events.
W1_MASTER_ADD/W1_MASTER_REMOVE - master add/remove events.
W1_MASTER_CMD - userspace command for bus master device (search/alarm search).
W1_SLAVE_CMD - userspace command for slave device (read/write/ search/alarm search
for bus master device where given slave device found).
__u8 res - reserved
__u16 len - size of attached to this header data.
union {
__u8 id; - slave unique device id
struct w1_mst {
__u32 id; - master's id.
__u32 res; - reserved
} mst;
} id;
[strucrt w1_netlink_cmd] - command for gived master or slave device.
__u8 cmd - command opcode.
W1_CMD_READ - read command.
W1_CMD_WRITE - write command.
W1_CMD_SEARCH - search command.
W1_CMD_ALARM_SEARCH - alarm search command.
__u8 res - reserved
__u16 len - length of data for this command.
For read command data must be allocated like for write command.
__u8 data[0] - data for this command.
Each connector message can include one or more w1_netlink_msg with zero of more attached w1_netlink_cmd messages.
For event messages there are no w1_netlink_cmd embedded structures, only connector header
and w1_netlink_msg strucutre with "len" field being zero and filled type (one of event types)
and id - either 8 bytes of slave unique id in host order, or master's id, which is assigned
to bus master device when it is added to w1 core.
Currently replies to userspace commands are only generated for read command request.
One reply is generated exactly for one w1_netlink_cmd read request.
Replies are not combined when sent - i.e. typical reply messages looks like the following:
[cn_msg][w1_netlink_msg][w1_netlink_cmd]
cn_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_msg) + sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len;
w1_netlink_msg.len = sizeof(struct w1_netlink_cmd) + cmd->len;
w1_netlink_cmd.len = cmd->len;
Operation steps in w1 core when new command is received.
=======================================================
When new message (w1_netlink_msg) is received w1 core detects if it is master of slave request,
according to w1_netlink_msg.type field.
Then master or slave device is searched for.
When found, master device (requested or those one on where slave device is found) is locked.
If slave command is requested, then reset/select procedure is started to select given device.
Then all requested in w1_netlink_msg operations are performed one by one.
If command requires reply (like read command) it is sent on command completion.
When all commands (w1_netlink_cmd) are processed muster device is unlocked
and next w1_netlink_msg header processing started.
Connector [1] specific documentation.
====================================
Each connector message includes two u32 fields as "address".
w1 uses CN_W1_IDX and CN_W1_VAL defined in include/linux/connector.h header.
Each message also includes sequence and acknowledge numbers.
Sequence number for event messages is appropriate bus master sequence number increased with
each event message sent "through" this master.
Sequence number for userspace requests is set by userspace application.
Sequence number for reply is the same as was in request, and
acknowledge number is set to seq+1.
Additional documantion, source code examples.
============================================
1. Documentation/connector
2. http://tservice.net.ru/~s0mbre/archive/w1
This archive includes userspace application w1d.c which
uses read/write/search commands for all master/slave devices found on the bus.

65
MAINTAINERS
View File

@ -181,6 +181,12 @@ M: bcrl@kvack.org
L: linux-aio@kvack.org
S: Supported
ABIT UGURU HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
P: Hans de Goede
M: j.w.r.degoede@hhs.nl
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
ACENIC DRIVER
P: Jes Sorensen
M: jes@trained-monkey.org
@ -568,6 +574,24 @@ L: linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org
W: http://www.penguinppc.org/ppc64/
S: Supported
BROADCOM B44 10/100 ETHERNET DRIVER
P: Gary Zambrano
M: zambrano@broadcom.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
BROADCOM BNX2 GIGABIT ETHERNET DRIVER
P: Michael Chan
M: mchan@broadcom.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
BROADCOM TG3 GIGABIT ETHERNET DRIVER
P: Michael Chan
M: mchan@broadcom.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
BTTV VIDEO4LINUX DRIVER
P: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
M: mchehab@infradead.org
@ -1135,6 +1159,12 @@ L: linux-hams@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.nt.tuwien.ac.at/~kkudielk/Linux/
S: Maintained
HIGHPOINT ROCKETRAID 3xxx RAID DRIVER
P: HighPoint Linux Team
M: linux@highpoint-tech.com
W: http://www.highpoint-tech.com
S: Supported
HIPPI
P: Jes Sorensen
M: jes@trained-monkey.org
@ -1413,6 +1443,8 @@ P: Jesse Brandeburg
M: jesse.brandeburg@intel.com
P: Jeff Kirsher
M: jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1425,6 +1457,8 @@ P: Jesse Brandeburg
M: jesse.brandeburg@intel.com
P: Jeff Kirsher
M: jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1437,6 +1471,8 @@ P: John Ronciak
M: john.ronciak@intel.com
P: Jesse Brandeburg
M: jesse.brandeburg@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1825,12 +1861,12 @@ S: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://megaraid.lsilogic.com
S: Maintained
MEMORY TECHNOLOGY DEVICES
MEMORY TECHNOLOGY DEVICES (MTD)
P: David Woodhouse
M: dwmw2@infradead.org
W: http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
L: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/tglx/mtd-2.6.git
T: git git://git.infradead.org/mtd-2.6.git
S: Maintained
MICROTEK X6 SCANNER
@ -1877,6 +1913,11 @@ L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.atnf.csiro.au/~rgooch/linux/kernel-patches.html
S: Maintained
MULTIMEDIA CARD (MMC) SUBSYSTEM
P: Russell King
M: rmk+mmc@arm.linux.org.uk
S: Maintained
MULTISOUND SOUND DRIVER
P: Andrew Veliath
M: andrewtv@usa.net
@ -2028,6 +2069,12 @@ M: adaplas@pol.net
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
OPENCORES I2C BUS DRIVER
P: Peter Korsgaard
M: jacmet@sunsite.dk
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
ORACLE CLUSTER FILESYSTEM 2 (OCFS2)
P: Mark Fasheh
M: mark.fasheh@oracle.com
@ -2499,12 +2546,6 @@ M: thomas@winischhofer.net
W: http://www.winischhofer.at/linuxsisusbvga.shtml
S: Maintained
SMSC47M1 HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
P: Jean Delvare
M: khali@linux-fr.org
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Odd Fixes
SMB FILESYSTEM
P: Urban Widmark
M: urban@teststation.com
@ -3117,12 +3158,6 @@ L: wbsd-devel@list.drzeus.cx
W: http://projects.drzeus.cx/wbsd
S: Maintained
W83L785TS HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
P: Jean Delvare
M: khali@linux-fr.org
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Odd Fixes
WATCHDOG DEVICE DRIVERS
P: Wim Van Sebroeck
M: wim@iguana.be
@ -3162,7 +3197,7 @@ XFS FILESYSTEM
P: Silicon Graphics Inc
M: xfs-masters@oss.sgi.com
M: nathans@sgi.com
L: linux-xfs@oss.sgi.com
L: xfs@oss.sgi.com
W: http://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs
S: Supported

4
Makefile
View File

@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
VERSION = 2
PATCHLEVEL = 6
SUBLEVEL = 17
EXTRAVERSION =-rc5
NAME=Lordi Rules
EXTRAVERSION =
NAME=Crazed Snow-Weasel
# *DOCUMENTATION*
# To see a list of typical targets execute "make help"

2
arch/alpha/Kconfig
View File

@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ config ALPHA_IRONGATE
config GENERIC_HWEIGHT
bool
default y if !ALPHA_EV6 && !ALPHA_EV67
default y if !ALPHA_EV67
config ALPHA_AVANTI
bool

13
arch/alpha/kernel/alpha_ksyms.c
View File

@ -53,10 +53,6 @@ extern void __divqu (void);
extern void __remqu (void);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(alpha_mv);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(enable_irq);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(disable_irq);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(disable_irq_nosync);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(probe_irq_mask);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(screen_info);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(perf_irq);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(callback_getenv);
@ -68,19 +64,13 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(alpha_using_srm);
/* platform dependent support */
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strcat);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strcmp);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strcpy);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strlen);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strncmp);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strncpy);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strnlen);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strncat);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strstr);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strchr);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(strrchr);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(memcmp);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(memmove);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(memscan);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(__memcpy);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(__memset);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(__memsetw);
@ -122,11 +112,9 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(alpha_write_fp_reg_s);
/* In-kernel system calls. */
EXPORT_SYMBOL(kernel_thread);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_open);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_dup);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_exit);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_write);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_read);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_lseek);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(execve);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(sys_setsid);
@ -182,7 +170,6 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(smp_num_cpus);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(smp_call_function);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(smp_call_function_on_cpu);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(_atomic_dec_and_lock);
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cpu_present_mask);
#endif /* CONFIG_SMP */
/*

2
arch/alpha/kernel/osf_sys.c
View File

@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ do_osf_statfs(struct dentry * dentry, struct osf_statfs __user *buffer,
unsigned long bufsiz)
{
struct kstatfs linux_stat;
int error = vfs_statfs(dentry->d_inode->i_sb, &linux_stat);
int error = vfs_statfs(dentry, &linux_stat);
if (!error)
error = linux_to_osf_statfs(&linux_stat, buffer, bufsiz);
return error;

6
arch/alpha/kernel/process.c
View File

@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ common_shutdown_1(void *generic_ptr)
if (cpuid != boot_cpuid) {
flags |= 0x00040000UL; /* "remain halted" */
*pflags = flags;
clear_bit(cpuid, &cpu_present_mask);
cpu_clear(cpuid, cpu_present_map);
halt();
}
#endif
@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ common_shutdown_1(void *generic_ptr)
#ifdef CONFIG_SMP
/* Wait for the secondaries to halt. */
cpu_clear(boot_cpuid, cpu_possible_map);
while (cpus_weight(cpu_possible_map))
cpu_clear(boot_cpuid, cpu_present_map);
while (cpus_weight(cpu_present_map))
barrier();
#endif

2
arch/alpha/kernel/signal.c
View File

@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ give_sigsegv:
static inline void __user *
get_sigframe(struct k_sigaction *ka, unsigned long sp, size_t frame_size)
{
if ((ka->sa.sa_flags & SA_ONSTACK) != 0 && ! on_sig_stack(sp))
if ((ka->sa.sa_flags & SA_ONSTACK) != 0 && ! sas_ss_flags(sp))
sp = current->sas_ss_sp + current->sas_ss_size;
return (void __user *)((sp - frame_size) & -32ul);

14
arch/alpha/kernel/smp.c
View File

@ -68,7 +68,6 @@ enum ipi_message_type {
static int smp_secondary_alive __initdata = 0;
/* Which cpus ids came online. */
cpumask_t cpu_present_mask;
cpumask_t cpu_online_map;
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cpu_online_map);
@ -439,7 +438,7 @@ setup_smp(void)
if ((cpu->flags & 0x1cc) == 0x1cc) {
smp_num_probed++;
/* Assume here that "whami" == index */
cpu_set(i, cpu_present_mask);
cpu_set(i, cpu_present_map);
cpu->pal_revision = boot_cpu_palrev;
}
@ -450,11 +449,10 @@ setup_smp(void)
}
} else {
smp_num_probed = 1;
cpu_set(boot_cpuid, cpu_present_mask);
}
printk(KERN_INFO "SMP: %d CPUs probed -- cpu_present_mask = %lx\n",
smp_num_probed, cpu_possible_map.bits[0]);
printk(KERN_INFO "SMP: %d CPUs probed -- cpu_present_map = %lx\n",
smp_num_probed, cpu_present_map.bits[0]);
}
/*
@ -473,7 +471,7 @@ smp_prepare_cpus(unsigned int max_cpus)
/* Nothing to do on a UP box, or when told not to. */
if (smp_num_probed == 1 || max_cpus == 0) {
cpu_present_mask = cpumask_of_cpu(boot_cpuid);
cpu_present_map = cpumask_of_cpu(boot_cpuid);
printk(KERN_INFO "SMP mode deactivated.\n");
return;
}
@ -486,10 +484,6 @@ smp_prepare_cpus(unsigned int max_cpus)
void __devinit
smp_prepare_boot_cpu(void)
{
/*
* Mark the boot cpu (current cpu) as online
*/
cpu_set(smp_processor_id(), cpu_online_map);
}
int __devinit

2
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_titan.c
View File

@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ titan_update_irq_hw(unsigned long mask)
register int bcpu = boot_cpuid;
#ifdef CONFIG_SMP
cpumask_t cpm = cpu_present_mask;
cpumask_t cpm = cpu_present_map;
volatile unsigned long *dim0, *dim1, *dim2, *dim3;
unsigned long mask0, mask1, mask2, mask3, dummy;

103
arch/arm/Kconfig
View File

@ -93,15 +93,49 @@ choice
prompt "ARM system type"
default ARCH_VERSATILE
config ARCH_AAEC2000
bool "Agilent AAEC-2000 based"
select ARM_AMBA
help
This enables support for systems based on the Agilent AAEC-2000
config ARCH_INTEGRATOR
bool "ARM Ltd. Integrator family"
select ARM_AMBA
select ICST525
help
Support for ARM's Integrator platform.
config ARCH_REALVIEW
bool "ARM Ltd. RealView family"
select ARM_AMBA
select ICST307
help
This enables support for ARM Ltd RealView boards.
config ARCH_VERSATILE
bool "ARM Ltd. Versatile family"
select ARM_AMBA
select ARM_VIC
select ICST307
help
This enables support for ARM Ltd Versatile board.
config ARCH_AT91RM9200
bool "Atmel AT91RM9200"
help
Say Y here if you intend to run this kernel on an Atmel
AT91RM9200-based board.
config ARCH_CLPS7500
bool "Cirrus-CL-PS7500FE"
bool "Cirrus CL-PS7500FE"
select TIMER_ACORN
select ISA
help
Support for the Cirrus Logic PS7500FE system-on-a-chip.
config ARCH_CLPS711X
bool "CLPS711x/EP721x-based"
bool "Cirrus Logic CLPS711x/EP721x-based"
help
Support for Cirrus Logic 711x/721x based boards.
@ -135,12 +169,22 @@ config ARCH_FOOTBRIDGE
Support for systems based on the DC21285 companion chip
("FootBridge"), such as the Simtec CATS and the Rebel NetWinder.
config ARCH_INTEGRATOR
bool "Integrator"
select ARM_AMBA
select ICST525
config ARCH_NETX
bool "Hilscher NetX based"
select ARM_VIC
help
Support for ARM's Integrator platform.
This enables support for systems based on the Hilscher NetX Soc
config ARCH_H720X
bool "Hynix HMS720x-based"
select ISA_DMA_API
help
This enables support for systems based on the Hynix HMS720x
config ARCH_IMX
bool "IMX"
help
Support for Motorola's i.MX family of processors (MX1, MXL).
config ARCH_IOP3XX
bool "IOP3xx-based"
@ -178,6 +222,11 @@ config ARCH_L7200
If you have any questions or comments about the Linux kernel port
to this board, send e-mail to <sjhill@cotw.com>.
config ARCH_PNX4008
bool "Philips Nexperia PNX4008 Mobile"
help
This enables support for Philips PNX4008 mobile platform.
config ARCH_PXA
bool "PXA2xx-based"
select ARCH_MTD_XIP
@ -232,44 +281,6 @@ config ARCH_OMAP
help
Support for TI's OMAP platform (OMAP1 and OMAP2).
config ARCH_VERSATILE
bool "Versatile"
select ARM_AMBA
select ARM_VIC
select ICST307
help
This enables support for ARM Ltd Versatile board.
config ARCH_REALVIEW
bool "RealView"
select ARM_AMBA
select ICST307
help
This enables support for ARM Ltd RealView boards.
config ARCH_IMX
bool "IMX"
help
Support for Motorola's i.MX family of processors (MX1, MXL).
config ARCH_H720X
bool "Hynix-HMS720x-based"
select ISA_DMA_API
help
This enables support for systems based on the Hynix HMS720x
config ARCH_AAEC2000
bool "Agilent AAEC-2000 based"
select ARM_AMBA
help
This enables support for systems based on the Agilent AAEC-2000
config ARCH_AT91RM9200
bool "AT91RM9200"
help
Say Y here if you intend to run this kernel on an Atmel
AT91RM9200-based board.
endchoice
source "arch/arm/mach-clps711x/Kconfig"
@ -314,6 +325,8 @@ source "arch/arm/mach-realview/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-at91rm9200/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-netx/Kconfig"
# Definitions to make life easier
config ARCH_ACORN
bool

2
arch/arm/Kconfig.debug
View File

@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ config DEBUG_S3C2410_UART
help
Choice for UART for kernel low-level using S3C2410 UARTS,
should be between zero and two. The port must have been
initalised by the boot-loader before use.
initialised by the boot-loader before use.
The uncompressor code port configuration is now handled
by CONFIG_S3C2410_LOWLEVEL_UART_PORT.

2
arch/arm/Makefile
View File

@ -116,6 +116,8 @@ endif
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_REALVIEW) := realview
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_AT91RM9200) := at91rm9200
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_EP93XX) := ep93xx
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_PNX4008) := pnx4008
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NETX) := netx
ifeq ($(CONFIG_ARCH_EBSA110),y)
# This is what happens if you forget the IOCS16 line.

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More